5 Series Gran
Turismo
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you
make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The
manual also contains information designed to enhance operating
reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the
value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the
printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
© 2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/13, 03 13 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 230.
6 Notes
At a glance
12 Cockpit
16 iDrive
22 Voice activation system
25 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
30 Opening and closing
49 Adjusting
63 Transporting children safely
68 Driving
81 Displays
97 Lamps
102 Safety
122 Driving stability control systems
130 Driving comfort
152 Climate control
159 Interior equipment
167 Storage compartments
Driving tips
174 Things to remember when driving
177 Loading
180 Saving fuel
Mobility
188 Refueling
190 Fuel
191 Wheels and tires
201 Engine compartment
203 Engine oil
205 Coolant
206 Maintenance
208 Replacing components
215 Breakdown assistance
220 Care
Reference
226 Technical data
230 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
User's manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication and the short commands of the
voice activation system are described in a sep‐
arate user's manual, which is also included with
the onboard literature.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
lect individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment is
also described and illustrated that is not availa‐
ble in your vehicle, e.g. because of the selected
optional equipment or the country-specific var‐
iants.
This also applies for safety-related functions
and systems.
For options and equipment not described in this
Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
arranged differently than shown in the illustra‐
tions.
Status of the Owner's Manual
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived
to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Seite 6
Notes
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐
ods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and Accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐
chase accessories tested and approved by
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐
ously acquire the assurance that they have been
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum
performance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not
accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐
stallation of parts and accessories not approved
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐
sional advice on using these items, are available
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
of non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
wheels, suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones, including operation of any
mobile phone from within the vehicle without
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
electrical system or affect the validity of the
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
placement, or repair of the emission control de‐
vices and systems may be performed by any au‐
tomotive repair establishment or individual
using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
components and parts, including components
found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐
ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐
productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
Seite 7
Notes
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐
erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐
erate your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
meet different prevailing operating conditions
and homologation requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In
such case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi‐
cle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical information
about the condition of the vehicle, events and
faults. This technical information generally
documents the state of a component, a module,
a system or the environment:
▷ Operating states of system components, fill
levels for instance.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its
individual components, e.g., wheel rotation
speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration, trans‐
verse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, engage‐
ment of stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is used
to detect and correct faults and to optimize ve‐
hicle functions. Motion profiles over routes trav‐
eled cannot be created from this data. When
service offerings are used, e.g., repair services,
service processes, warranty claims, quality as‐
surance, this technical information can be read
out from the event and fault memories by the
service personnel, including the manufacturer,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
further information there if it is needed. After a
fault is corrected, the information in the fault
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐
ous basis.
When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐
ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐
ciate this technical data with individuals if it is
combined with other information, e.g., an acci‐
dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye witness
accounts — possibly with the assistance of an
expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐
cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle
data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
Seite 8
Notes
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 9
Notes
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Seating comfort functions
Seat, mirror, steering wheel mem‐
ory 59
Active seat 52
2 Roller sunblinds 46
3 Safety switch for the rear windows and roller
sunblinds 46
4 Power windows 45
5 Exterior mirror operation 60
6 Driver assistance systems
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 118
Collision warning 112, 110
Lane departure warning 117
Night Vision with pedestrian de‐
tection 114
Head-up Display 150
7 Lamps
Seite 12
At a glance Cockpit
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Front fog lamps 100
Parking lamps 97
Low beams 97
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 98
Daytime running lights 98
Adaptive light control 99
High-beam Assistant 99
Instrument lighting 100
8 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 75
High beams, head‐
lamp flasher 75
High-beam Assistant 99
Roadside parking lamps 98
Computer 92
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
Store speed 137 131
Resume speed 138 132
Cruise control on/off, interrupting
136 131
Increase distance 132
Decrease distance 132
Cruise control rocker switch 137 132
10 Instrument cluster 81
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation 22
Phone, see user's manual for Nav‐
igation, Entertainment and Com‐
munication.
Thumbwheel for selection lists 92
12 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 76
Rain sensor 77
Clean the windshields and head‐
lamps 76
13 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 69
Auto Start/Stop function 70
14 Horn
15 Steering wheel heating 62
16 Adjust the steering wheel 62
17 Open the tailgate 39
18 Unlocking the hood
Seite 13
Cockpit At a glance
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
All around the center console
1 Headliner 15
2 Control Display 16
3 Glove compartment 167
4 Air vent 155
5 Hazard warning system 215
Central locking system 37
6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
7 Automatic climate control 152
8 Controller with buttons 16
9 Parking brake 72
Auto Hold 74
10 PDC Park Distance Control 138
Top View 144
Backup camera 140
Side View 143
11 Dynamic Driving Control 127
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 127
12 Transmission selector lever
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Hints
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
1.
Turn.
Seite 16
At a glance iDrive
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation
menu.
TEL Opens the Telephone
menu.
BACK Displays the previous
panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1.
Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Seite 17
iDrive At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The current panel is closed and the previous
panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previous
display.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate
that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐
played.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1.
Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the sta‐
tus field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio™ is switched on.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception strength
Symbol flashes: searching for net‐
work.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Symbol Meaning
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter the PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
Rear AUX-IN port on the left.
Rear AUX-IN port on the right.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched off.
Request of the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Running a function
Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top edge
of the screen.
▷ To display short information: touch the but‐
ton.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
General information
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter
or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Move the controller up.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐
try for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can be
entered using the spelling of language avail‐
able on the Control Display.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated by spoken
commands via the voice activation system.
The system prompts you to make your en‐
tries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐
ing the voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐
tem.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identified.
Set the language, refer to page 95.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate the
function in this case via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on which
menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Short commands exist for many functions.
Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can
also be selected via the voice activation system.
Speak these list entries exactly as they are dis‐
played in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed,
the commands for the settings are read out loud.
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, nearly ir‐
respective of which menu item is currently se‐
lected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
Seite 22
At a glance Voice activation system
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication Owner's Manual.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐
portant commands for them are announced.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the voice
activation system is announced.
Example: playing back a CD
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. ›C D‹
5. ›C D drive‹
6. ›Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4.
Via short command
Playback of the CD can also be started via a short
command.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D drive track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an‐
nouncements from the system are issued in an
abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech m.:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a te‐
lephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 215, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Seite 23
Voice activation system At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 24
At a glance Voice activation system
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. The equipment
and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐
bed therein.
Components of the integrated Owner's
Manual
The integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or access possibilities.
Quick Reference Guide
Located in the Quick Reference is important in‐
formation for the operation of the vehicle, the
operation of basic vehicle functions or for what
to do in the event of a flat tire. This information
can also be displayed during driving.
Search by pictures
Information and descriptions based on illustra‐
tions can be searched via search by pictures.
This is helpful, for example, if the description of
an outfitting package that cannot be named is
needed.
Owner's Manual
Information and descriptions can be searched
by direct entry of a search term via the index.
Select components
1.
Press the button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to leaf from page to page.
Leaf back.
Leaf forward.
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be opened directly.
Seite 25
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu:
1.
Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1. Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press the button again to return to the
function displayed last.
5.
Press the button to return to the page
of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
2.
Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 26
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Seite 27
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the large tailgate
4 Panic mode, headl. courtesy delay feat.
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls
with keys.
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the vehicle, Personal
Profile, refer to page 31.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 206.
Programming the button assignment
for the remote control
The button assignment on the remote control
can be set variously depending on how the ve‐
hicle is equipped and according to the country-
specific variant.
Programming options and the actual button as‐
signment may vary depending on how the vehi‐
cle is equipped and according to the country-
specific variant.
You can program which functions are enabled
when button
or button on the remote
control is pressed.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Call the desired button.
4. Call the desired function.
The selected function is stored for the button
and the remote control currently in use.
Integrated key
Press the button on the back of the remote con‐
trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest.
Seite 30
Controls Opening and closing
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The storage compartment contains a switch for
separately securing the tailgate, refer to
page 41.
Replacing the battery
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment; see arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover closed.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
ter or to your service center.
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Emergency detection of remote control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the
engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to remote
control by external sources.
▷ Discharged battery in the remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by mobile
devices in close proximity to the remote
control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mobile
devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine with emergency
detection of the remote control
If a corresponding Check Control message ap‐
pears, hold the remote control, as shown,
against the marked area on the steering column
and press the Start/Stop button within 10 sec‐
onds while pressing the brake.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated.
▷ The remote control used is detected when
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile
is called up.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone else
with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for three Per‐
sonal Profiles and one guest profile.
Seite 31
Opening and closing Controls
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Transmitting the settings
Your personal settings can be taken with you to
another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
file function. For more information, contact your
service center.
Transmission takes place via:
▷ The USB interface in the center armrest
onto a USB device.
Profile management
Opening the profiles
A different profile can be called up than the one
associated with the remote control currently in
use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
The profile that is opened is assigned to the re‐
mote control currently in use.
Renaming profiles
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Reset current profile"
Importing profiles
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 163: "USB
device"
Seite 32
Controls Opening and closing
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile and the saved
contacts can be exported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop for example.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 163: "USB
device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile can be used to make individual
settings without affecting the three Personal
Profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using the
vehicle temporarily and do not have their own
profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. The current profile is selected.
4. Open "Guest".
5. Adjust the settings.
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start for selecting the desired profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
More information on the settings can be found
under:
▷ Active Cruise Control: collision warning.
▷ Collision warning: warning time, last setting
on/off.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to
last.
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control: sport program.
▷ Driver's seat position: automatic retrieval af‐
ter unlocking.
▷ Programmable memory buttons: assign‐
ment.
▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness, po‐
sition and rotation of the display.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐
ting.
▷ Tone: tone settings.
▷ Automatic climate control: settings.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice
output on/off.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian detection: se‐
lection of functions and type of display.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the
signal tone volume.
▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to
last, special settings.
▷ Backup camera: selection of functions and
type of display.
▷ Side View: selection of the display type.
▷ Language on the Control Display.
▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/off.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting, on/
off.
▷ Daytime running lights: current setting.
▷ Triple turn signal activation.
▷ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or
after starting to drive.
Seite 33
Opening and closing Controls
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Tailgate.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the driver's door lock.
▷ Via the door handles.
▷ Via the button on the tailgate.
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
▷ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,
the theft protection is activated/deactivated.
Theft protection prevents the doors from
being unlocked using the lock buttons or the
door opener.
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 43, is
armed or disarmed.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Opening and closing: from the
outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button on the remote control.
The vehicle is unlocked.
Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy
lamps are switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select a symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or the
country-specific variant, you can set whether
the doors are also unlocked with the
button on the remote control.
Convenient opening
The remote control can be used to simultane‐
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The windows and the glass sunroof open.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Locking
Press the button on the remote control.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on interior lamps and
courtesy lamps
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlamp courtesy
delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote
control.
The key assignment on the remote control can
be set variously.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
Opening the tailgate
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
The large tailgate opens slightly, regardless of
whether it was previously locked or unlocked.
Note the opening height of the large tail‐
gate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when
the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
In some vehicle equipment variants, the tailgate
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle has been unlocked.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control is locked inside the vehicle when the tail‐
gate is closed.◀
Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel settings
The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel positions selected last are stored for the
currently used remote control.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure that
the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
Otherwise, people can be injured or objects
damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and steer‐
ing wheel memory is pressed briefly.
Activating the setting
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. "Last seat position auto."
Malfunction
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked with the remote control, the battery may
be discharged or there may be interference from
external sources such as mobile phones, metal
objects, overhead power lines, transmission
towers, etc.
If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the
door lock using the integrated key.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Remove the key before pulling the door
handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the
key.◀
In some country-specific versions, the alarm
system is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via
the door lock.
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control, or switch on the igni‐
tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the
remote control.
In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
driver's door can be unlocked or locked via the
door lock.
Locking the doors and tailgate at once
To lock all doors and the tailgate at once:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using
the button for the central locking system in
the interior.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door from
the outside.
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the
remote control.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock
the vehicle using the integrated key via the door
lock on the driver's door.
Opening and closing: from the
inside
Locking and unlocking
Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the
doors and the tailgate when the front doors are
closed, but they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
the second time opens it.
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Doors
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Tailgate
Opening
Opening the large tailgate
Note the opening height of the tailgate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it
opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance
when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
▷ Press the button on the tailgate, arrow 1.
▷ Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
▷ Push the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, provided that the tailgate has not
been locked.
Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Opening the small tailgate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
▷ Press the button on the tailgate, arrow 2.
Provide edge protection
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
Closing
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate
can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
gate.
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control is locked inside the vehicle when the tail‐
gate is closed.◀
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only.
It is closed automatically.
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Locking the vehicle
Press the button on the open tailgate.
When the driver's door is closed, the vehicle is
completely locked.
Automatic tailgate operation
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the large tailgate should
open.
Adjusting the opening height
When adjusting the opening height, en‐
sure that there is a clearance of at least
4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the
ceiling may not be high enough for the open tail‐
gate if the load situation changes.◀
1. "Settings"
2. "Tailgate"
3. Turn the controller until the desired opening
height is selected.
Opening the large tailgate
Note the opening height of the tailgate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it
opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance
when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage
may result.
Adjust the opening height of the large tailgate
according to the given situation.◀
The large tailgate opens automatically to the ad‐
justed opening height.
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
gate, arrow 1.
▷ Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
▷ Push the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
▷ With Comfort Access, the tailgate opens
with no-touch activation, refer to page 42.
Pressing the button again stops the motion.
The opening procedure is likewise interrupted:
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
Opening the large tailgate further
Press and hold the button on the inside of the
large tailgate, arrow 2, to open the large tailgate
to the maximum opening height.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Closing the large tailgate
▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of
the large tailgate.
The tailgate closes automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
▷ With Comfort Access:
Press the button on the open tailgate.
Tailgate closes automatically and the vehi‐
cle is locked.
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
gate, arrow 1.
Pressing again stops the motion.
The closing operation is interrupted:
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the tail‐
gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control is locked inside the vehicle when the tail‐
gate is closed.◀
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate
the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and
smooth motion.
Do not operate the tailgate manually if it is
blocked
If the tailgate is blocked, do not operate it man‐
ually as the tailgate may otherwise become
damaged and injury may result.
Contact your service center.◀
Locking separately
The tailgate can be locked separately, using the
switch in the front center armrest.
▷ The tailgate is locked, ar‐
row 1.
The small and large tailgates
are locked.
▷ The tailgate is unlocked, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the tailgate and disconnects it from the
central locking system.
When the center armrest is locked, the tailgate
cannot be accessed. This is beneficial when the
vehicle is parked using valet service. The infra‐
red remote control can be handed out without
the key.
Emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The tailgate is unlocked.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
▷ Open tailgate with no-touch activation.
▷ Start the engine.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the remote
control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons of the remote control or Comfort Ac‐
cess.
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Unlocking
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre‐
sponds to pressing the button on the remote
control.
Locking
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the button on
the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
Convenient closing
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
the finger and hold it down.
In addition to locking, the windows and the glass
sunroof are closed.
Monitor the closing process
Monitor the closing process to ensure that
no one becomes trapped.◀
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press the center button on the exterior of the
tailgate to open the large tailgate, refer to
page 38.
This corresponds to pressing the
button
on the remote control.
The button assignment on the remote control
can be set variously depending on how the ve‐
hicle is equipped and according to the country-
specific variant.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control is locked inside the vehicle when the tail‐
gate is closed.◀
Opening tailgate with no-touch
activation
With Comfort Access and automatic tailgate op‐
eration, the large tailgate can be opened using
the remote control you are carrying.
Not on vehicles with a trailer hitch.
A sensor detects a directed foot motion in the
center of the area at the rear of the car and the
tailgate opens.
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
Do not touch vehicle
With the foot motion, make sure there is
steady stance and do not touch the vehicle; oth‐
erwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from hot
exhaust system parts.◀
1.
Position in the center behind the vehicle.
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
2. Move foot in the direction of travel under‐
neath the bumper and immediately back.
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it was
previously locked or unlocked.
Preventing inadvertent opening
In situations where the tailgate should not
be opened with no-touch activation, ensure that
the remote control is located beyond the range
of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear
of the car.
Otherwise, the tailgate may be opened inadver‐
tently, for example by an unintentional or misin‐
terpreted movement of the foot.◀
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
experiences interference from external sources
such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead
power lines, transmission towers, etc.
In this case, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
If there is a malfunction, open the tailgate with
the remote control button or with the button on
the tailgate.
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the vehicle.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the
car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control, Comfort Access or at the
door lock the alarm system is armed or disarmed
at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
on some country-specific versions.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the ignition,
if necessary, by emergency detection of the re‐
mote control.
Tailgate and armed alarm system
The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm
system is armed.
▷ Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
The large tailgate opens slightly.
With Comfort Access, the tailgate opens with
no-touch activation, refer to page 42.
Note the opening height of the large tail‐
gate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when
the large tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again if the doors are locked. The hazard
warning system flashes once.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the tailgate
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the
remote control with you, pull on the driver
side or front passenger side door handle.
Indicator lamp on the interior rear view
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes
continuously. Interior motion sensor and tilt
alarm sensor are not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be closed
for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the power windows and injure
themselves.◀
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Convenient opening, refer to page 35, via the
remote control.
Closing
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 35, via the
remote control.
Convenient closing, refer to page 42, with Com‐
fort Access.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the range
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Safety switch
The following functions can be locked simulta‐
neously, using the switch:
▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows
using the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the roller sunblinds using the
switches in the rear.
▷ Adjustment of the power rear seats.
▷ Adjustment of the power head restraints in
the rear.
Switching on and off
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transporting
children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result
if the windows are closed without supervision.◀
Roller sunblinds
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for example, from op‐
erating the roller blinds using the switches in the
rear.
Press the safety switch in the driver's door. The
LED lights up if the safety function is switched
on.
If you are no longer able to move the roller blinds
after having activated them consecutively a
number of times, the system is blocked for a
limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐
tem cool.
The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low in‐
terior temperatures.
Driver's door controls
Roller blinds for rear side windows
Press the button.
Rear door controls
Roller blind for the side windows
Press the button.
The roller blind can only be extended or re‐
tracted when the side window is closed.
Raising and lowering the roller blinds
together
Press the button.
Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Panoramic-glass sunroof
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately, using the same
switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.◀
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch upward briefly.
▷ The closed roof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens
slightly.
▷ The opened roof closes until
it is in its tilted position. The
sliding visor stays completely
open.
Opening/closing the sliding visor
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor moves while
the switch is being held.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
When the sliding visor is open, proceed as de‐
scribed under Sliding visor.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch again stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 35, via the
remote control.
Convenient closing, refer to page 42, with Com‐
fort Access.
Comfort position
Stops the roof in the comfort position if the roof
is not fully open. This reduces wind noise in the
passenger compartment.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the switch.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the
middle of the opening in the roof, or from the
tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
Seite 47
Opening and closing Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
extreme situations, such as when thin objects
are present.◀
Closing from the open position without
pinch protection
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1.
Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and hold.
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a
certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the roof
closes without pinch protection.
Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
ing process, the roof can only be operated to a
limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the roof closes without
pinch protection.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is complete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the sunroof and sliding
visor are completely closed.
▷ The roof closes without pinch protection.
Seite 48
Controls Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 56.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 57.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 102.
Front seats
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle con‐
trol could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Also on the front passenger side, do not incline
the backrest on the front passenger side too far
to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of
slipping under the safety belt in the event of an
accident. This would eliminate the protection
normally provided by the belt.◀
Semi-electrically adjustable seats
At a glance
1 Thigh support
2 Tilt
3 Forward/backward
4 Lumbar support
5 Height
6 Backrest
Tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat en‐
gages properly.
Seite 49
Adjusting Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐
erly.
Height
Move the button in the required direction.
Backrest
Move the button in the required direction.
Electrically adjustable seats
At a glance
1 Lumbar support
2 Backrest width
3 Shoulder support
4 Backrest
5 Forward/back, height, tilt
6 Thigh support
Note
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for
the remote control currently in use. When the
vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the
position is automatically retrieved if the Func‐
tion, refer to page 36, for this is activated.
Adjustments in detail
1.
Forward/back.
Seite 50
Controls Adjusting
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
2. Height.
3. Seat tilt.
4. Backrest tilt.
5. Thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section of
the switch.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the backrest using the side
wings to adjust the lateral support.
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Shoulder support
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
Seite 51
Adjusting Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Active seat
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐
tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to
help prevent lower back pain.
Press the button. The LED lights up.
Front seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 181, is activated,
the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐
rest can be distributed in different ways.
1. "Climate"
2. "Seat heating distribution"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Active seat ventilation, front
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.
The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehicle
interior is overheated or for continuous cooling
at high temperatures.
Switching on
Press the button once for each ventila‐
tion level.
Seite 52
Controls Adjusting
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The highest level is active when three LEDs are
lit.
If when the seat ventilation is turned on the Max‐
imum Cooling function is activated, the seat
ventilation automatically switches to the highest
level. When the Maximum Cooling function is
switched off, the unit switches back to the pre‐
viously set level.
After a short time, the system automatically
moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Rear seats
General information
The switches for adjusting the seats are located
on the center armrest of the rear seats.
Center armrest
When folding down the center armrest,
ensure that the area below the center head re‐
straint is clear. Otherwise, injury may result.◀
Manually adjustable seats
At a glance
1 Forward/backward
2 Backrest
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the level, move the seat forward
or back slightly until it engages.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the back‐
rest or lift it off.
Electrically adjustable seats
At a glance
1 Forward/backward
2 Shoulder support
3 Backrest, head restraint
Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The seats cannot be adjusted if the safety
switch for the power windows has been
pressed.
Adjustments in detail
1. Forward/back.
2. Backrest tilt.
3. Head restraint.
Shoulder support
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Lumbar support
The contour of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch.
The curvature is increased/decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/down.
Seite 54
Controls Adjusting
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Reset to standard position
Maintain pressure on the button until the system
completes the adjustment.
Rear seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 181, is activated,
the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐
rest can be distributed in different ways.
1. "Climate"
2. "Seat heating rear"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Active seat ventilation
Switching on
Press the button once for each ventila‐
tion level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are
lit.
If when the seat ventilation is turned on the Max‐
imum Cooling function is activated, the seat
ventilation automatically switches to the highest
level. When the Maximum Cooling function is
switched off, the unit switches to the previously
set level.
Seite 55
Adjusting Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has four or five seating positions,
each of which is equipped with a safety belt.
Notes
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for passen‐
gers sitting on the left and right.
▷ The center rear seat belt buckle is solely in‐
tended for the center passenger.
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to wear
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small
children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low
around the hips in the lap area and does not
press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can
slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐
pact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐
ble objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the
belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt
1.
Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up
and a signal sounds. Make sure that the
safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Seite 56
Controls Adjusting
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Front head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
proximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
Reduced protective function
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint cov‐
ers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
on the head restraints.
▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW
to the seat or head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will be impaired and the personal
safety of the occupants will be endangered.◀
Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
▷ To raise: pull.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the height: electrical head
restraints
Adjusting electrically.
Distance to back of head: manual head
restraints
▷ Forward: by pulling
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Seite 57
Adjusting Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Distance to back of head: electrical
head restraints
The head restraint is automatically repositioned
when the shoulder support is adjusted.
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold forward for increased lateral support in the
resting position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
proximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
▷ To raise: pull.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the height: electrical head
restraints
Move the switch in the desired direction.
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐
ing position.
Seite 58
Controls Adjusting
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Removing: manual head restraints
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as pos‐
sible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Removing: electrical head restraints
For technical reasons, the head restraint cannot
be removed.
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory
General information
Front
Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and
steering wheel positions can be stored and re‐
trieved for each remote control. The adjustment
of the lumbar support is not stored.
Rear
Two different seat positions can be stored and
retrieved.
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat
or steering wheel could result in an accident.◀
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
Seite 59
Adjusting Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until
the adjustment procedure is completed.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat
positions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
At a glance
1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more curved
than the driver's side mirror.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you see
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
accident.◀
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
mirror setting is stored for the remote control in
use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote
control, the position is automatically retrieved if
the setting for this function is active.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 59.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Seite 60
Controls Adjusting
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out
Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed.
Photocells are used for control in the Interior rear
view mirror, refer to page 61.
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect
From behind when driving at night: turn the
knob.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
The concept
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Seite 61
Adjusting Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Manual steering wheel adjustment
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Power steering wheel adjustment
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rections.
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 59.
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 62
Controls Adjusting
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Only transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the
rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in
accordance with the age, weight and size of the
child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in‐
jury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their
age, weight and size.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint fixing system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au‐
tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags,
refer to page 104.
Note
Deactivated front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint fixing
systems
Before mounting
If the rear seat backrests are adjustable or can
be folded down:
Lock the rear seat backrests in position
Before mounting child restraint fixing sys‐
tems, place the seat backrest as far as possible
at an angle at which the child seat is resting
firmly against the backrest and all backrests can
be locked securely in place. Otherwise, the child
seat will not be as stable as it should be, and
there is increased danger of injury due to unex‐
pected movement of the seat backrest.◀
Notes
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
Seite 63
Transporting children safely Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
After installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐
matically, refer to page 104
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and bring it up to medium height to ob‐
tain the best possible position for the belt and to
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
Do not change the seat position and height after
this.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint fixing system in the front passen‐
ger seat, open the backrest width completely.
Do not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest
width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the
stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing systems, observe the operating and safety
information from the system manufacturer; oth‐
erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀
Seite 64
Controls Transporting children safely
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb when the child is restr-
ained by the internal harnesses.
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐
ing system is resting snugly against the back‐
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.◀
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐
straint fixing system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated behind the seat cover between the back‐
rest and the seat cushion at the marked loca‐
tions.
Exposing the lower LATCH anchors
1.
Reach between the seat cushion and the
backrest.
2. Detach the seat cover from the Velcro® fas‐
tener.
3. Pull the seat cover forward.
Without power rear seats: Mounting
ISOFIX child restraint fixing systems
1. Move the seat to its rearmost position.
2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest
back slightly.
3. Fold the leather cover on the seat forward.
4. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the user's manual of the system.
5. Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors
have properly engaged and that the child re‐
straint fixing system is resting snugly
against the backrest.
6. After mounting the system, move the back‐
rest back up slightly so that the child re‐
straint fixing system rests against the back‐
rest.
With power rear seats: Mounting
ISOFIX child restraint fixing systems
1.
Before mounting, adjust the seats to their
basic position, refer to page 55.
2. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the user's manual of the system.
3. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
LATCH mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
Seite 65
Transporting children safely Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Mounting points
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are
two outer or three mounting points for child re‐
straint fixing systems with a tether strap.
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not routed over the head restraints or sharp
edges and is free of twisting on its way to the
upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐
not properly secure the child restraint fixing sys‐
tem in an accident.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eye
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1. Raise the head restraint.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
mounting eye.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
5. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounting points
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are
two outer or three mounting points for child re‐
straint fixing systems with a tether strap.
Fold up the middle mounting point.
LATCH mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not routed over the head restraints or sharp
edges and is free of twisting on its way to the
upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐
Seite 66
Controls Transporting children safely
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
not properly secure the child restraint fixing sys‐
tem in an accident.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eye
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Raise the head restraint if necessary.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
mounting eye.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
5. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and
windows
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to
page 46.
Seite 67
Transporting children safely Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off and
starts the engine.
The engine starts if the brake
pedal is pressed when you press
the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on
Press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on
the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
The ignition switches off automatically:
▷ When the vehicle is locked, if the low beams
are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Note
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically switches
to the radio ready state when the door is opened
if the lights are switched off or the daytime run‐
ning lights are switched on.
Ignition off
Press the Start/Stop button again, and do not
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
not switched off accidentally.◀
Ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is stopped:
▷ During locking, also with the low beams ac‐
tivated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available when
the low beams are switched off.
▷ When opening and closing the driver door, if
the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if
the driver's door is open and the low beams
are switched off.
When the ignition is switched off, by opening or
closing the driver's door or unbuckling the driv‐
er's seat belt, the radio ready state remains ac‐
tive.
Seite 68
Controls Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Radio ready state
Activate radio ready state:
▷ When the ignition is switched off: press ON/
OFF button on the radio.
▷ When the engine is running: press the Start/
Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐
main ready for operation.
Radio ready state switches off automatically:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Starting the engine
General information
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of dan‐
ger.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐
mission in position P or neutral to prevent the
vehicle from moving.◀
Repeated starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to
start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several
times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is
not burned or is inadequately burned, posing a
risk of overheating and damage to the catalytic
converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod‐
erate engine speeds.
Starting the engine
Press on the brake pedal and
press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is cranked until it
starts.
Engine stop
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot start the engine.◀
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb. ◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car
wash, heed the information regarding Washing
in automatic car washes, refer to page 220.
Switching off the engine
1.
Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Seite 69
Driving Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Auto Start/Stop function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in a traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving off.
Certain vehicle components may experience
additional wear as a result of this system.
Automatic mode
The Auto Start/Stop function is operational after
each engine start.
This function is activated at speeds faster than
about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically during
a stop under the following conditions:
Automatic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in transmission position
D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The air flow of the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is ready
for an automatic engine start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been satisfied.
Note
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The passenger compartment has not yet
been heated or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
ing wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the automatic
climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ HDC is activated.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ The transmission selector lever is in position
N or M/S.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Automatic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
When Automatic Hold is activated: press the
accelerator.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of the
following conditions are met.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Seite 70
Controls Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Some indicator lamps light up for varying
lengths of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Note
Even if driving away was not intended, the de‐
activated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the passenger com‐
partment when the cooling function is
switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from P to N, D, R, or M/
S.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the automatic
climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐
partment when the heating is switched on.
Preventing an automatic engine stop
with automatic transmission
The concept
To make it possible to drive away very quickly,
such as at an intersection, the automatic engine
stop can be actively prevented.
Preventing an engine stop using the
brake pedal
The engine stop can be actively prevented
within one second after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
▷ Immediately after the vehicle comes to a
standstill, briefly press the brake pedal
forcefully.
▷ Then press the brake pedal with normal
braking force.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press the button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it.
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Transmission position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, such as when the driver is detected to be
absent.
Seite 71
Driving Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches of the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb. ◀
While driving
Use while driving serves as an emergency brak‐
ing function:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the button is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up red, a signal
sounds and the brake lamps light up.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models.
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.
Releasing
Press the switch while the brake pedal is
pressed or transmission position P is en‐
gaged.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
Automatic release
For automatic release, operate the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Subject to the following requirements, the park‐
ing brake is automatically released by operation
of the accelerator pedal:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive position engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Inadvertent operation of the accelerator
pedal
Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op‐
erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is
set in motion and there is a risk of an accident.◀
Manual release
The parking brake can be released manually in
the event of a power failure or electrical fault.
Seite 72
Controls Driving
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Before releasing, secure the vehicle
against rolling
Before releasing the parking brake manually,
and whenever you park the vehicle with the
parking brake released, ensure that position P of
the automatic transmission is engaged.
Secure the vehicle in a manner appropriate to
the inclination of the road, e.g., with a wheel
chock; otherwise, there is the danger of the ve‐
hicle rolling.◀
Unlocking
1.
Raise the rear cargo floor cover in the cargo
area, arrow 1, and fasten it with a retaining
strap.
2. Remove the release tool from the onboard
vehicle tool kit.
3. Take out the floor trim in the cargo area, re‐
moving the clips with a screwdriver, arrows.
4. Hook the release tool into the release point,
arrow.
5. Forcefully pull the release tool up against the
resistance until you notice a marked in‐
crease in the resistance and the parking
brake releases audibly.
Have the malfunction corrected
If the parking brake has been released
manually in response to a malfunction, only
technicians can return it to operation.
Have the malfunction corrected by your service
center.◀
Seite 73
Driving Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
After a power failure
Only put the parking brake into operation
after a power failure
The parking brake should only be put into oper‐
ation again if it was manually released due to an
interruption in the supply of electrical power.
Otherwise, it cannot be ensured that the parking
brake will function properly.◀
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1. Switch on the ignition.
2.
Press the switch while the brake is de‐
pressed or transmission position P is en‐
gaged.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models.
Automatic Hold
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving away.
For your safety
Under the following conditions, Automatic Hold
is automatically deactivated and the parking
brake is set:
▷ The engine is switched off.
▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
using the parking brake.
The indicator lamp switches from green
to red and the letters AUTO H go out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models.
Before driving away:
▷ Release the parking brake manually.
▷ Reactivate Automatic Hold.
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and ensure that the parking brake is set.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Activating
This function can be activated when the driver's
door is closed and the safety belt is fastened,
and while driving.
Press the button.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light
up.
Seite 74
Controls Driving
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating
Press the button again.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐
matic Hold is deactivated automatically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto‐
matically secured against rolling after braking to
a standstill.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Before driving into a car wash
Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the
parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to
roll.◀
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the en‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is being
held by Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set if the engine
is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
vated.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Automatic Hold remains activated during an en‐
gine stop brought about by the Auto Start/Stop
function.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving
it.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐
sistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐
dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
Seite 75
Driving Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The function can be activated or deactivated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
blades and the windshield wiper motor may be
damaged.◀
No wiper operation on dry windshield
Do not use the windshield wipers if the
windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper
blades or cause them to become worn more
quickly.◀
Switching on
Press the wiper levers up.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
The wipers switch to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the wiper levers down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
Seite 76
Controls Driving
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Rain sensor
The concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wiping
operation is started. At temperatures below
32 ℉/0 ℃, a wiping operation is not started.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐
age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐
tion.◀
Rain sensor, sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel.
Clean the windshield, headlamps
Pull the wiper lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular
intervals when the vehicle lights are switched
on.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of
resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical
position.
Seite 77
Driving Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise,
the wipers may become damaged when they are
switched on.◀
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are ready
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause in‐
jury if it is used incorrectly.
Therefore, keep it away from sources of ignition.
Only keep it in the closed original container and
inaccessible to children.
Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container. Use
BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate or the
equivalent.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer concen‐
trate and water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐
ommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate un‐
diluted and do not fill with pure water; this could
damage the wiper system.
Do not fill with undiluted antifreeze.
For the capacity, refer to technical data.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 68, position P is engaged automatically.
Seite 78
Controls Driving
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to
page 69, or when the ignition is switched off,
refer to page 68, and when position R or D is
engaged.
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐
gaged.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐
tion P of the automatic transmission is engaged.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond the
resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the brake
pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start driv‐
ing
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain pres‐
sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
to start.◀
Engaging D, R and N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
center position.
Press unlock button, in order to:
▷ Engage R.
▷ Shift out of P.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Seite 79
Driving Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Sport program DS and manual mode M/
S
Activating the sport program
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Activating the M/S manual mode
1.
Push the selector lever to the left out of
transmission position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, e.g., M1.
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as
needed.
Switching to manual mode
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
sible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Sport automatic
transmission
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the trans‐
mission temporarily switches to manual mode.
If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
is not accelerated for a certain time, the system
switches back into automatic mode if the selec‐
tor lever is in transmission position D.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is dis‐
played, e.g.: P.
Seite 80
Controls Driving
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Displays
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 88
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps 85
4 Tachometer 88
5 Oil temperature 88
6 Electronic displays 82
7 Reset miles 88
Seite 81
Displays Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Messages, e.g. Check Control 85
Time 88
Date 89
2 Range 89
3 Computer 92
Speed limit detection 90
4 Navigation display, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
Service requirements 89
Miles/trip miles 88
5 Selection list, such as for the radio 92
Current fuel consumption 89
Energy recovery 89
External temperature 88
Transmission display 80
Multifunctional instrument
display
The concept
The instrument dispaly is a variable display.
When the driving mode is changed, the appear‐
ance is changed to reflect the new driving mode.
The change of appearance can be deactivated
in the Control Display.
Some of the displays in the instrument display
may differ from the way they are shown in this
owner's manual.
Seite 82
Controls Displays
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
At a glance
1 Fuel gauge 88
2 Indicator/warning lamps 85
3 Speedometer
4 Variable displays
5 Tachometer 88
Selection lists 92
ECO PRO displays 181
6 Oil temperature 88
7 Computer 92
8 Reset miles 88
Switching the change of display on and off
You can set whether the instrument display
changes to the ECO PRO displays or Sport dis‐
plays automatically when you switch driving
modes.
Without Professional navigation
system
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "ECO PRO Info"
With Professional navigation system or
TV
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Driving mode view"
With Professional Navigation System:
switching zoom function on/off
Switching
You can program whether the current speed is
to appear enlarged in the speedometer.
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Magnifier function"
Seite 83
Displays Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
ECO PRO displays
1 Speedometer
2 Variable displays: ECO PRO Tips, Deceler‐
ation assistant instructions, Driver assist
system displays
3 Efficiency display 181
4 Transmission display 80
5 ▷ Blue: bonus range
▷ Gray: range
In ECO PRO driving mode, the instrument dis‐
play switches to the ECO PRO displays. These
displays support a driving style that saves on
fuel consumption with more prominent repre‐
sentation of the efficiency display and various
ECO PRO tips.
Seite 84
Controls Displays
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Sport displays
1 Speedometer
2 Tachometer
3 Transmission display 80
4 Variable displays
In the Sport and Sport+ modes, the instrument
display switches to the sport displays. This dis‐
play supports a sporty driving style with more
prominent representation of the tachometer,
the transmission displays, and the vehicle
speed.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and
a text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lamps
Instrument cluster
Seite 85
Displays Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Instrument display
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Symbol Function or system
Turn signal
Parking brake
Parking brake in Canadian models
Automatic Hold
Front fog lamps
High beams
High-beam Assistant
Parking lamps, headlamp control
Symbol Function or system
Active Cruise Control
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise
Control
Cruise control
Lane departure warning
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC Dynamic Stability Control or
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Tire Pressure Monitor
Flat Tire Monitor
Safety belts
Airbag system
Steering system
Engine functions
Engine functions in Canadian mod‐
els
Brake system
Brake system in Canadian models
Seite 86
Controls Displays
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Symbol Function or system
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS Antilock Brake System in Cana‐
dian models
At least one Check Control message
is displayed or is stored
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Addition information, such as on the cause of a
fault or the required action, can be called up via
Check Control.
The supplementary text of urgent messages is
displayed on the Control Display automatically.
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared un‐
til the malfunction is eliminated. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages that are displayed during
driving are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Seite 87
Displays Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Fuel gauge
The vehicle inclination may
cause the display to vary.
US models: the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 188.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted
to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
dle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. A Check Control
message is also displayed.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes too
hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 205.
Odometer and trip odometer
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Display/reset miles
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is switched
off, the time, external temper‐
ature and odometer are dis‐
played.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
External temperature warning
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds.
A Check Control message is dis‐
played.
There is an increased risk of ice
on roads.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,
there can be a risk of ice on roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example, to avoid the increased risk of
an accident.◀
Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time format,
refer to page 95.
Seite 88
Controls Displays
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Setting the date and date format,
refer to page 95.
Range
After the reserve range is
reached:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when cornering quickly, operation of the
engine is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not
ensured and damage may occur.◀
Displaying the cruising range
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The range is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Range when destination guidance is
activated in the navigation system
When destination guidance is ac‐
tivated in the navigation system,
the range up to the destination is
displayed.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driving
in an efficient and environmen‐
tally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consumption
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Energy recovery
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy
while coasting. The vehicle bat‐
tery is partially charged and fuel
consumption can be reduced.
Service requirements
Display
The driving distance or the time
to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance is displayed briefly after
the ignition is switched on.
The current service require‐
ments can be read out from the remote control
by the service specialist.
With TeleService, data regarding the service
status or legally mandated inspections of your
vehicle are automatically transmitted to your
service center before the service due date.
Seite 89
Displays Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a le‐
gally mandated inspection is
approaching.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
correctly.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally man‐
dated inspections of the vehicle are automati‐
cally transmitted to your service center before a
service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Speed limit detection with No
Passing Information
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
detected speed limit. The camera at the base of
the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs
at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐
head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols
for wet road conditions, etc. are also detected
and compared with vehicle interior data, such as
for the rain sensor, and are displayed depending
on the situation. The system takes into account
the information stored in the navigation system
and also displays speed limits present on routes
without signs.
No Passing Information
No Passing Information in the instrument cluster
displays the beginnings and ends of no passing
zones detected by the camera. The system ac‐
counts for only the beginnings and ends of No
Passing zones marked by signs.
No display is shown:
▷ In countries where No Passing zones are
primarily identified with road markings.
Seite 90
Controls Displays
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ On routes without signage.
▷ Where there are railroad crossings, highway
markings or other situations where no sig‐
nage is present, but passing would not be
permitted.
Hints
Speed limits when towing a trailer are not
shown.
Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
The system assists the driver and does not re‐
place the human eye.◀
At a glance
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the mir‐
ror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Speed limit information"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be
displayed on the info display in the instrument
cluster via the onboard computer. No Passing
Information is displayed together with the acti‐
vated speed limit information.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Speed limit detection
Current speed limit.
Speed limit detection is not avail‐
able.
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
No Passing Information
▷ Start of No Passing zone.
▷ End of No Passing zone.
▷ No Passing Information not
available.
No Passing Information can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following
situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
Seite 91
Displays Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in the road network.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
The following can be operated using the buttons
and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial on telephone.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the
thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pressing the thumbwheel.
Computer
Indication in the info display
The information from the on‐
board computer is shown in the
info display in the instrument
cluster.
Calling up information on the info
display
Press the onboard computer button on the turn
signal lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of the
instrument cluster.
Seite 92
Controls Displays
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever calls up the following information on the
info display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
When the arrow view in the Head-up Display
is inactive.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough
fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color
of the display changes.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period during which the
engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
onboard computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped do not enter into the
calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the computer button on the turn
signal lever.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is dis‐
played if a destination is entered in the naviga‐
tion system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit detection
Description of the speed limit detection, refer to
page 90, function.
Speed limit
Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Seite 93
Displays Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
limit.
Trip computer
The vehicle features two types of computer.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an over‐
view of the current trip.
Resetting the trip computer
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the onboard computer or trip computer
on the Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption or
speed
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Cons." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Seite 94
Controls Displays
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
Seite 95
Displays Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis‐
tance and temperature:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Seite 96
Controls Displays
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
At a glance
1 Rear fog lamps
2 Front fog lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive Light
Control, High-beam Assistant, Welcome
lamps, Daytime running lights
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights
5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam
Assistant
7 Instrument lighting
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
General information
Switch position: 0, ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to start
the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 98.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 97
Lamps Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after the
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.: s"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position : the low beams are switched
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐
light or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment
in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually un‐
der these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐
ning lights light up in position 0,
or .
After the ignition is switched off, the parking
lamps light up in position .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac‐
tivate the daytime running lights.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Seite 98
Controls Lamps
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Adaptive light control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
Activating
Switch position
with the ignition switched
on.
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Light Control does not swivel to the driver's side
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is
active.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the
light distribution to the contours of the road.
The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to
avoid blinding oncoming traffic and tilted in de‐
pressions to increase visibility.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐
tem automatically switches the high beams on
and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor
on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The
assistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating
1.
Turn the light switch to or .
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the lights are switched on, the
high beams are switched on and off automati‐
cally.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Seite 99
Lamps Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light. To reactivate
the High-beam Assistant, press the button on
the turn signal lever.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the mir‐
ror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 98, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lamps.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lamps or low beams
must be switched on to adjust the
brightness.
Adjust the brightness using the
thumbwheel.
Seite 100
Controls Lamps
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.
1 Interior lamps
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lamps on and off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lamps.
When the interior lamps are switched off per‐
manently, the reading lamps cannot be switched
on.
Bang & Olufsen High End Surround
Sound System
Adjusting speaker lighting
All speakers in the vehicle are illuminated. The
lighting can be individually set.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "B & O"
4. Select the desired lighting setting.
▷ "Off": no lighting.
▷ "Reduced": all speakers in the field of
view are hidden while driving.
▷ "On": all speakers are always illumi‐
nated.
Seite 101
Lamps Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Safety
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
head.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Seite 102
Controls Safety
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
attach holders such as for navigation instru‐
ments and mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the
sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐
desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
When the ignition is switch on, the warn‐
ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐
erational readiness of the entire airbag system
and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Seite 103
Safety Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
When there is a malfunction, have the air‐
bag system checked immediately
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag
system checked immediately; otherwise, there
is a risk that the system does not function as ex‐
pected in the event of an accident despite cor‐
responding severity of the accident.◀
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
sistance of the human body.
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐
cordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
passenger airbags may not function properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions
under Children on the front passenger seat.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically recommended by
the manufacturer of your vehicle.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat or the seat is empty. The
airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are not activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated in
a child seat, especially in the child seats that
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
manufactured. After installing a child seat, make
Seite 104
Controls Safety
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas‐
senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the
child seat has been detected and the front pas‐
senger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag
The strength with which the driver's and front
passenger airbags are triggered depends on the
position of the driver's and front passenger
seats.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1.
Move the respective seat forward all the
way.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or
damage to objects.◀
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In‐
itialize the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set inflation
tire pressures as reference values for the detec‐
tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
Seite 105
Safety Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐
ular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 198, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can‐
not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla‐
tion pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
Seite 106
Controls Safety
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire pressure in the four
mounted tires. The system warns you if there is
a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves
measure the tire pressure and tire temperature.
Hints
Tire damage due to external factors
Sudden tire damage caused by external
influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀
Pay attention to the other information and indi‐
cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 191, as well when using the system.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the cor‐
rect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable
signaling of tire pressure loss is not ensured.
Reset the system again after each correction of
the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐
sure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Status display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires and a text message on the Con‐
trol Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning relative
to the tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for
this may be:
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ Malfunction.
Seite 107
Safety Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
For Canadian models: Additional
information
The status display additionally shows the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressures and tire tempera‐
tures. The values shown are current measure‐
ment values and may vary depending on driving
style or weather conditions.
Carry out reset
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Carry out the reset with "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is dis‐
played.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the tire inflation pressures set are
accepted as reference values. The reset is com‐
pleted automatically during driving. After suc‐
cessful completion of the reset, the tires appear
in green on the Control Display and "TPM
active" is displayed.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the reset resumes automati‐
cally.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ A reset of the system was not carried out af‐
ter a wheel was changed. The system there‐
fore issues a warning based on the tire pres‐
sures before the last reset.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐
ular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 198, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐
essary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, it is possible that a reset was not
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In
that case, carry out a reset.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked at
the next opportunity and have them re‐
placed if necessary.
Seite 108
Controls Safety
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, it is possible that a reset was not
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In
that case, carry out a reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Message when the system was not
reset
A Check Control message is displayed.
The system has detected a wheel change, but
no reset was carried out
Warnings regarding the current tire inflation
pressure are not reliable.
Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out a
reset of the system.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a reset
has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is re‐
ported even though the tire inflation pressures
are correct.
The tire pressure depends on the temperature
of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g., due
to driving or because of the heat of the Sun, the
tire inflation pressure increases also. The tire
pressure is reduced when the tire temperature
falls again. This behavior may cause a warning
to be issued if temperatures fall very sharply.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
Seite 109
Safety Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if necessary.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area
of the disturbance, the system automatically
becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐
tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il‐
luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-in‐
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub‐
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating prop‐
erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com‐
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then re‐
main continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐
function indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Collision warning with
braking function
The concept
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is
controlled via the cruise control radar sensor.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
danger of collision at speeds above approx.
10 mph/15 km/h. The time of these warnings
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
It responds to moving objects that are within the
detection range of the radar system.
Seite 110
Controls Safety
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
When the vehicle is intentionally brought into
contact with a vehicle, the collision warning is
delayed to avoid false warnings.
Switching on/off
Switching the warning function on/off
Press the button
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1.
Activate collision warning.
2. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Display
Warning stages
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning with braking function
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.
The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐
vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is
accompanied by a braking intervention.
The braking intervention is executed with lim‐
ited braking force and for a brief period only. The
intervention will not bring the vehicle to a com‐
plete standstill.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The acute warning does not relieve the
driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her
driving speed and style to the traffic condi‐
tions.◀
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch
off the collision warning with braking function to
prevent undesired interventions.
The braking function is deactivated if the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic
Traction Control is deactivated.
Display in the instrument cluster
The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and
acoustically.
Seite 111
Safety Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Warning stages
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready
to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an
accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The system's detection capabilities are limited.
This may result in the warning not being issued
or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not be
detected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sensor
is dirty or obscured.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this may
result in increased false warnings.
Collision warning
The concept
If the vehicle does not include Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is
controlled via the camera in the base of the in‐
terior rearview mirror.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
danger of collision at speeds above approx.
10 mph/15 km/h. The time of these warnings
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
In the process, vehicles in a similar direction of
movement are observed if they are located
within the detection range of the system.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought into
contact with a vehicle, the collision warning is
delayed to avoid misleading warnings.
Seite 112
Controls Safety
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Warning stages
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at
a relatively high differential speed.
Switching the warning function on/off
Press the button
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1.
Activate collision warning.
2. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Display in the instrument cluster
The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and
acoustically.
Warning stages
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready
to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an
accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The detection capacity of the camera and the
collision warning has limitations.
This may result in the warning not being issued
or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not be
detected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Seite 113
Safety Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐
shield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ In the case of vehicles with insufficiently visi‐
ble tail lamps.
▷ In the case of partially covered vehicles.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
▷ During the calibration process of the camera
immediately after vehicle shipment.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this may
result in increased false warnings.
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the mir‐
ror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Night Vision with pedestrian
detection
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night
vision system.
An infrared camera records the area in front of
the vehicle and displays the image on the Con‐
trol Display.
The picture is a heat image. The system has an
integrated pedestrian detection function that
detects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects
that are similar in shape to human beings are
detected by the system.
Personal responsibility
Night Vision cannot replace the driver's
personal judgment of the visibility conditions
and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the
actual visibility conditions must always be the
basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted;
otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.◀
Heat image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold
objects, a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object and
the background and on the level of heat radiation
emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in
temperature to the environment or that radiate
very little heat are difficult to detect.
Seite 114
Controls Safety
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient
light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Pedestrian detection
The pedestrian detection and warning system
only operates in darkness and only when a heat
image is displayed.
Warm objects that are similar in shape to human
beings are detected by the system.
People detected by the system are displayed
with a slight yellow hue.
Under good ambient conditions, the pedestrian
detection system operates within a range of ap‐
prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m.
Environmental influences can limit the availabil‐
ity of pedestrian detection.
If pedestrian detection is not available, a symbol
is displayed in the heat image.
This symbol disappears when the function be‐
comes available again.
Warning of people in danger
If the system detects a person in a defined area
in front of the vehicle and if there is the danger
of collision with this person, a warning symbol
appears on the Control Display and in the Head-
up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided
into two areas.
▷ Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle.
▷ Expanded area 2 to the right and left.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐
creases, the area becomes longer and wider, for
example.
Prewarning
The yellow symbol is displayed when a
person is detected in the central area,
Seite 115
Safety Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
arrow 1, immediately in front of the vehicle.
The yellow symbol is displayed when a
person detected in the extended area,
arrow 2, is moving from the right or left
to the central area.
Acute warning
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds. You are requested to intervene
immediately by braking or making an
evasive maneuver.
Display in the Head-up Display
The warning is displayed simultane‐
ously in the Head-Up Display and on the
Control Display. The displayed symbol
can vary with the people detected. For people
located in the central area, the distance to the
person is indicated by the size of the symbol.
System limits
Basic limits
System operation is limited in situations such as
the following:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective
glass is damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian detection
Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de‐
tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
the image.
Limited pedestrian detection:
▷ People who are fully or partially covered, es‐
pecially when their heads are covered.
▷ People who are not in an upright position,
e.g., lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
No display on the rear screen
The image from Night Vision with people detec‐
tion cannot be displayed on the rear screen.
Activation/deactivation
Press the button.
Display
Night Vision with pedestrian detection is not
available on the rear screen.
Adjustments via the iDrive
With Night Vision switched on:
1.
Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec‐
tion.
2. Press the controller.
3. Open the desired menu item.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
▷ "Pedestrian detection"
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Seite 116
Controls Safety
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Camera
Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper‐
ation.
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
The camera is automatically cleaned together
with the headlamps.
Clean the lens, refer to page 223.
Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane mark‐
ings is about to leave the lane. Depending on the
country-specific version of the vehicle, the
speed is between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h. When switching on the system
below this speed, a message appears in the in‐
strument cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the
event of warnings. The time of the warning may
vary depending on the current driving situation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the course
of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Lane departure warning
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the mir‐
ror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Press the button
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 117
Safety Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
Display in the instrument display
▷ Symbol red: system is activated.
▷ Symbol green: at least one lane
marking was detected and warnings
can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,
diverging, or multiple lane markings such as
in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by ob‐
jects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon‐
itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up
dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehicle's
surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident
is still possible despite all warnings.◀
Seite 118
Controls Safety
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
At a glance
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds above
approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit‐
ical zone.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
Seite 119
Safety Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Active Protection
General information
The Active Protection safety package consists
of systems that are independent of each other:
▷ PreCrash
▷ PostCrash
PreCrash
The concept
The system is used to detect critical driving sit‐
uations that might lead to an accident. In these
situations, preventative protection measures
are automatically undertaken to minimize the
risk in the event of an accident as much as pos‐
sible.
Critical driving situations may include:
▷ Full brake applications.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
If the vehicle includes the collision warning or
collision warning with braking feature, impend‐
ing collisions with vehicles driving ahead or
stopped in front of you can also be detected
within the system's range.
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation. The system may not always detect
critical situations reliably and in a timely manner.
Adapt speed to traffic situation and drive alertly;
otherwise, a risk to safety may result.◀
Function
After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts
are automatically pretensioned once after the
vehicle is driven is away.
In critical driving situations, the following indi‐
vidual functions become active as needed:
▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐
sioned.
▷ Automatic closing of the windows.
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.
▷ Automatic Positioning of the backrest for
the front passenger seat.
▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats in
the rear: automatic positioning of the back‐
rests for the rear passenger seats.
Seite 120
Controls Safety
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front belts are loosened again. All other
systems can be restored to the desired setting.
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the
red button in the buckle. Fasten the belt before
continuing on your trip.
PostCrash
If an accident above a certain degree of severity,
the system automatically brakes the vehicle to a
standstill. This can reduce the risk of a further
collision and the consequences thereof.
Depressing the brake pedal can cause the vehi‐
cle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
braking. Depressing the accelerator pedal also
interrupts automatic braking.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released au‐
tomatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
Seite 121
Safety Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with the Active Cruise Control,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐
tions. Refer also to Collision warning, refer to
page 110.
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradients.
The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
is being used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driving
without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐
prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
back.◀
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes at individual wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
Seite 122
Controls Driving stability control systems
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
bends.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering system are only performed by the rear
axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward momen‐
tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed
snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
der the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed
in the tachometer.
Seite 123
Driving stability control systems Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control is activated.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep down‐
hill gradients. Without applying the brakes, the
vehicle moves at slightly more than walking
speed.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds
below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving
downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed to ap‐
prox. walking speed and then keeps its speed
constant.
As long as there is active braking, the system is
on standby. The system does not brake the ve‐
hicle during this time.
Use HDC in low gears or in transmission position
D or R only.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed
Specify desired speed in the range from approx.
4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h using
the rocker switch of the cruise control on the
steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be changed
by lightly accelerating.
▷ Press up the rocker switch to the point of
resistance: the speed increases gradually.
▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point of
resistance: the speed increases while the
rocker switch is pressed.
▷ Press down the rocker switch to the point of
resistance: the speed decreases gradually.
▷ Press down the rocker switch past the point
of resistance: when driving forward, the
speed decreases to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h;
when reversing, the speed decreases to ap‐
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h.
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED above the but‐
ton lights up.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again and the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Seite 124
Controls Driving stability control systems
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Display in the instrument cluster
The selected speed is displayed
in the speedometer.
▷ Green: the system is actively
braking the vehicle.
▷ Orange: the system is on
standby.
Malfunction
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated
brake temperatures.
Adaptive Drive
The concept
Adaptive Drive includes the following systems:
▷ Dynamic Drive, refer to page 125
▷ Dynamic Damping Control, refer to
page 125
The system increases driving stability and driv‐
ing comfort.
Dynamic Drive
The concept
Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of
the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in
curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐
creased under all driving conditions. The system
utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear
axles that react immediately to all driving situa‐
tions.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Dynamics Control, refer to page 127.
SPORT
Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.
Dynamic Damping Control
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort as required for the road surface and
driving style.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Dynamics Control, refer to page 127.
SPORT / SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock absorb‐
ers for greater driving agility.
COMFORT / ECO PRO
Balanced tuning between the COMFORT+ and
SPORT or SPORT+ programs.
COMFORT+
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers
for optimal traveling comfort.
Integral Active Steering
The concept
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
Active Steering varies the steering angle of the
wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐
ment as a function of the speed.
Seite 125
Driving stability control systems Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g.,
in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e.,
steering becomes more direct.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐
verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a
direction opposite to the front wheels.
At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐
ingly reduced.
The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as
the front wheels.
In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can
specifically steer the front and rear wheels to
stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes,
e.g., when braking where road conditions differ
on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Initializing
In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐
alize the Integral Active Steering.
The warning lamp lights up. A Check
Control message is displayed.
1.
With the engine running, turn the steering
wheel all the way to the left and right several
times in a uniform manner until the warning
lamp disappears.
2. Have the system checked if the warning
lamp does not go out after moving the steer‐
ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering
wheel is at an angle.
Using snow chains
Ensure that the rear axle steering is deactivated
when using snow chains, refer to page 199.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Dynamics Control, refer to page 127.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active
Steering for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Balanced tuning between the COMFORT+ and
SPORT programs.
COMFORT+
Consistently comfort-oriented tuning of the In‐
tegral Active Steering for optimal traveling com‐
fort.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
must be turned further, while the vehicle re‐
sponds more sensitively to steering wheel
movements in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
activated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked.
Self-leveling suspension
The concept
The self-leveling suspension keeps the vehicle
height and ground clearance constant. The
height of the vehicle at the rear axle is main‐
tained at a predefined level under all load con‐
ditions.
The system ensures consistent comfort by
keeping spring travel constant in all driving sit‐
uations.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. A mal‐
function has occurred in the self-leveling sus‐
pension. Vehicle handling may be altered and
driving comfort may be noticeably reduced. Visit
your nearest service center.
Seite 126
Controls Driving stability control systems
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Driving Dynamics Control
The concept
The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to
adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For
this purpose various programs are available for
selection that are activated via the two buttons
of the Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
OFF-button.
Operating the programs
Press the button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
COMFORT+
ECO PRO
Automatic program change
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Integral Active Steering.
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
DSC OFF
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering system are only performed by the rear
axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC OFF
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru‐
ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in the
tachometer.
The DSC system is switched off.
Deactivating DSC OFF
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF
is activated.
TRACTION
Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐
ing stability is limited during acceleration and
when driving in bends.
Activating TRACTION
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the tachom‐
eter.
The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Deactivating TRACTION
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is
displayed in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: TRACTION
is activated.
Seite 127
Driving stability control systems Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and
adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐
bilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the tachometer
and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up in the
instrument cluster.
Automatic program change
When switching on the adjustable speed limit or
activating cruise control, the program automat‐
ically switches to SPORT mode.
Indicator/warning lamps
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension
and engine control for greater driving agility with
maximum driving stabilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
The configuration is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT appears in the tachometer.
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 129, the SPORT driving
mode can be set.
After the SPORT driving mode is activated, se‐
lect "Configure SPORT" on the displayed panel
and configure the program.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1. "Settings"
2. "SPORT mode" or: "Driving mode"
3. Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT
driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press the button repeatedly until the
program display in the tachometer
goes out.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 127.
COMFORT+
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers
and adapted engine control for optimal traveling
comfort with maximum driving stabilization.
Activating COMFORT+
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT+ appears in the tachometer.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 181, provides consis‐
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
zation.
Comfort functions and the engine controller are
adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Seite 128
Controls Driving stability control systems
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Make the desired settings.
Configure driving mode
Settings can be made for the following driving
modes in Driving mode:
▷ SPORT mode, refer to page 128.
▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 181.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a list
of the selectable programs.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed briefly on
the Control Display.
To do so, make the following settings:
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Driving mode info"
Seite 129
Driving stability control systems Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function, ACC
The concept
This system can be used to select a desired
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads.
To the extent possible, the system automatically
adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of
you.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead
begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the
system is able to detect this within the given
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives
away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to
accelerate if operated accordingly.
Even if some time passes before the vehicle
drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐
erated automatically and simply.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the
desired speed.
The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill
slopes if engine power is insufficient.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her speed, dis‐
tance and driving style to the traffic conditions.
You should drive attentively and intervene ac‐
tively when necessary, e.g. by braking or making
an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger
of an accident.◀
At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
1 System on/off, interrupt
2 Resume speed
3 Store speed
4 Reduce distance
5 Store, maintain/change speed
6 Increase distance
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for
detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the ve‐
hicle.
Seite 130
Controls Driving comfort
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec‐
tion of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sen‐
sor.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
If switching off the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
and distance are deleted.
Interrupting the system
Press the button on the steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ When transmission position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is ac‐
tivated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened when the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for an
extended period, e.g., on a road with very lit‐
tle traffic without road edge line markings.
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the button.
Or:
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the instrument cluster, refer to page 133.
Seite 131
Driving comfort Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Changing, maintaining, and storing the
speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys‐
tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur‐
rent speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched on, if necessary.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Speed differences
Large differences in speed relative to ve‐
hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐
sated by the system for example in the following
situations:
▷ When catching up rapidly with a truck.
▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves
into the wrong lane.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Distance
Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traffic
and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the
prescribed safety distance.◀
Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 133, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 133, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Calling up the desired speed and
distance
While driving
Press the button with the system
switched on.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Seite 132
Controls Driving comfort
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
While standing
Before leaving the vehicle, secure it
against rolling.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and apply the parking brake. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
The system brought the vehicle to a complete
standstill:
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as
soon as the vehicle in the range of the radar
sensor moves off.
▷ Marking in the speedometer turns orange:
no automatic driving away.
To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐
matically, press the accelerator briefly or
press the RES or SET button.
Rolling bars in the distance display indicate that
the vehicle in the radar sensor detection range
has moved off.
Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing on
the brake pedal and it is standing behind another
vehicle:
1. Press the button to call up a stored
desired speed.
2. Release the brake pedal.
3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the
RES button or the rocker switch when the
vehicle ahead of you drives away.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
With instrument display: the symbol is
displayed in the speedometer similarly
to the mark for the desired speed.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the system
requirements for operation are currently not
met.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving
ahead of you is shown.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
Seite 133
Driving comfort Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Indicator/warning lamps
Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
his or her desired driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀
The vehicle symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for op‐
erating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively assume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by brak‐
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from Active Cruise Control can
also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
Adjusting the Head-up Display, refer to
page 150.
System limits
Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The desired speed can be selected between
20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa‐
tion when using the system.
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.
Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you
can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g.,
a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic
congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road
users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Oncoming traffic.
No warnings
A warning may not be issued when ap‐
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Seite 134
Controls Driving comfort
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Unexpected lane change
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
into another lane from behind a stopped vehicle,
you yourself must react, as the system does not
react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There‐
fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be
detected at all, or not until after a considerable
delay.
When approaching a curve, the system may re‐
act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the
vehicle by the system can be compensated for
by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or be‐
hind bumps in the road.
Seite 135
Driving comfort Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Radar sensor
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐
sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused
by damage incurred during parking, for example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant
speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on
a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.◀
Controls
At a glance
1 System on/off, interrupt
2 Resume speed
3 Store speed
4 Store, maintain/change speed
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
Seite 136
Controls Driving comfort
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Press the button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting the system
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ HDC is activated.
Maintaining/storing the current speed
Press the button.
Or:
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the speedometer, refer to page 138.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Changing/maintaining speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys‐
tem is interrupted in order to maintain and store
the current speed.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
Max. adjustable speed: 140 mph/230 km/h.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it there accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring pres‐
sure on the accelerator. After the rocker
switch is released, the vehicle maintains its
final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the
resistance point causes the vehicle to ac‐
celerate more rapidly.
Seite 137
Driving comfort Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Resuming the desired speed
Press the button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster indicates whether the system is
switched on.
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
With instrument display: the symbol is
displayed in the speedometer similarly
to the mark for the desired speed.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the system
requirements for operation are currently not
met.
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or behind
your vehicle are indicated by:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors
in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
tone.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
Seite 138
Controls Driving comfort
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
PDC Park Distance Control
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the
backup camera, refer to page 140, can be
switched on.
Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
object. For example, if an object is detected to
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object becomes,
the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted,
refer to user's manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis‐
play before a signal tone sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
Seite 139
Driving comfort Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The range of the sensors is represented in col‐
ors: red, green and yellow.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
System limits
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With low objects.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
▷ In heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Surround View
The concept
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when park‐
ing, maneuvering, and at complex exits and in‐
tersections.
▷ Backup camera, refer to page 140
▷ Side View, refer to page 143.
▷ Top View, refer to page 144.
Backup camera
The concept
The backup camera provides assistance in park‐
ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be‐
hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the backup camera.◀
Seite 140
Controls Driving comfort
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Backup camera
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 223.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The backup camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The backup camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐
played.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Seite 141
Driving comfort Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Pathway lines
▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image
when in transmission position R.
▷ Help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷ Are dependent on the current steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image.
▷ Show the course of the smallest possible
turning circle on a level road.
▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed
when the steering wheel is turned.
Obstacle marking
▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in
the backup camera image.
Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
to the object shown.
Parking using pathway and turning
circle lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the turning circle
lines lead to within the limits of the parking
space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Seite 142
Controls Driving comfort
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Display settings
Brightness
With the backup camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the backup camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected by the backup camera.
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road users
concealed by obstacles to the left and right of
the vehicle can only be detected relatively late
from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two
cameras in the front of the vehicle record the
traffic situation on each side.
Notes
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re‐
sult from road users or objects located outside
the picture area of the Side View cameras.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Side View
Cameras
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers capture
the image.
The two camera lenses are located on the sides
of the bumper.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 223.
Switching on/off
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Seite 143
Driving comfort Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the
position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Top View
The concept
Top View assists you in parking and maneuver‐
ing. The area around the doors and the road area
around the vehicle are shown on the Control
Display for this purpose.
General information
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
backup camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex‐
terior mirrors are detected early.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the cameras.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Top View
Cameras
The lenses of the Top View cameras are located
at the bottom of the exterior mirror housings.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Seite 144
Controls Driving comfort
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Clean the lens, refer to page 223.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed, switch on the backup
camera via the iDrive, refer to page 145.
Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Display
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, a red bar
is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC
display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐
tivated.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display when reverse gear
is selected. To switch to Top View:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
"Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Displaying the turning circle and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you
in assessing the amount of space actually
needed to the side of the vehicle.
Seite 145
Driving comfort Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐
rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐
justed with the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.
Parking assistant
The concept
This system assists the driver in parking parallel
to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information issued by the PDC and the
parking assistant and accelerate or brake ac‐
cordingly.
A component of the parking assistant is the PDC
Park Distance Control, refer to page 138.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The parking assistant does not relieve the
driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the
parking procedure.
Watch the parking space and parking procedure
closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident.◀
Changes to the parking space
Changes to the parking space after it was
measured are not taken into account by the sys‐
tem.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Transporting loads
Loads that extend beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle are not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Curbs
The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehicle
may become damaged.◀
An engine that has been switched off by the
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Seite 146
Controls Driving comfort
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the driv‐
er's side, the corresponding turn signal must
be set.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's
length plus approx 4 ft/1.2 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking procedure
Closed doors.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Parking assistant
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasounds sensors used to measure park‐
ing spaces are located in the side turn signals.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button
Press the button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Activate: "Parking Assistant" Select the
symbol in the Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press the button.
▷ Switch off the ignition.
Display on the Control Display
Activating/deactivating the system
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
The system is activated.
Seite 147
Driving comfort Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Without Professional navigation
system or TV: system status
The status is displayed with symbols.
Gray: parking space search.
Blue: the system is activated. A
suitable parking space was
found.
The parking procedure is active.
Steering control has been seized.
Status of the parking space search
▷ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search.
▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.
The vehicle is parked in the parking space if
the parking procedure is active.
▷ No display: no parking space search.
With Professional navigation system or
TV: system status
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of
the vehicle representation. Parking assis‐
tant is activated and search for parking
space active.
▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next
to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the road
as on the Control Display. When the parking
assistant is active, suitable parking spaces
are highlighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been seized.
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐
ever the vehicle is moving forwards slow and
straight, even if the system is deactivated.
When the system is deactivated, the dis‐
plays on the Control Display are shown in
gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Check the traffic situation as well
Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐
cle can drown out the signal tones of the parking
assistant and PDC.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
1.
Switch on the parking assistant and activate
it if necessary.
Seite 148
Controls Driving comfort
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The status of the parking space search is in‐
dicated on the Control Display.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
To achieve the best possible parking posi‐
tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel
movement after the gear change when the
vehicle is stationary.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐
essary.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
▷ Press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the
instruction on the Control Display.
▷ If a turn signal is activated in the opposite
direction to the desired side for parking.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces
if necessary.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or
the time taken for parking is exceeded.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resume
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if necessary.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display to
do this.
System limits
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When sensors are dirty or iced over.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the
parking space.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,
such as fences.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected.
The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Seite 149
Driving comfort Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
Head-up Display
The concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
In this way, the driver can get information with‐
out averting his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Display
Overview
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Collision warning.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Lane departure warning.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly
as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
Seite 150
Controls Driving comfort
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting,
refer to page 100.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Adjusting the height
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Setting the rotation
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield replaced
by a service center only.
Seite 151
Driving comfort Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Climate control
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Automatic climate control
1 Air distribution, left
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program, left
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, residual heat, left
5 Remove ice and condensation
6 Maximum cooling
7 Display
8 Air flow, AUTO intensity, right
9 AUTO program, right
10 Temperature, right
11 Air distribution, right
12 Seat heating, right 52
13 Active seat ventilation, right 52
14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
15 Cooling function
16 Rear window defroster
17 ALL program
18 Active seat ventilation, left 52
19 Seat heating, left 52
Seite 152
Controls Climate control
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:
driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO
button on the driver's side to utilize the conden‐
sation sensor.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 154, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air flow and air distribution can be
adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Air flow, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air flow, switch
off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control may
be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
The air flow can be adjusted when the program
is active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
Seite 153
Climate control Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
The air flow can be adjusted when the program
is active.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
side air and controls the shutoff automati‐
cally.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO but‐
ton on the driver's side to utilize the condensa‐
tion sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the
windshield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified and, depend‐
ing on the temperature setting, warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 176, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
ALL program
The current settings on the driver's side
for temperature, air flow, air distribu‐
tion, and AUTO program are transferred to the
front passenger side and to the left and right
rear.
The program is switched off if the settings on
the front passenger side or in the rear are
changed.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
interior.
Functional requirement
▷ Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
▷ Warm engine.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
Switching on
1.
Switch off the ignition.
2.
Press the right side of the button on
the driver's side.
Seite 154
Controls Climate control
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
is shown on the display of the automatic cli‐
mate control.
The interior temperature, air volume and air dis‐
tribution can be adjusted with the ignition
switched on.
Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the
button on the driver's side.
on the display of the automatic climate control
goes out.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
▷ Complete system:
Press and hold the left button on
the driver's side until the control
clicks off.
▷ On the front passenger side:
Press and hold the left button on
the front passenger side.
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ ALL program.
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
This combined filter should be replaced during
scheduled maintenance, refer to page 206, of
your vehicle.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 3.
Ventilation levels
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air
current is fanned out.
▷ Maximum air flow:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is
partially fanned out and partially bundled.
This maximizes the air supply.
▷ Direct ventilation:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air is
bundled and can be directed to a specific
point.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐
rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hot
from the sun.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Seite 155
Climate control Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Ventilation in rear, center
▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 3.
Lateral ventilation
Thumbwheel for continuous opening and clos‐
ing of the vents, arrow.
Rear automatic climate
control
At a glance
1 Temperature
2 AUTO program
3 Vent settings
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity
5 Display
6 Maximum cooling
7 Seat heating 55
8 Active seat ventilation 55
Switching the rear automatic climate
control on/off
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Rear climate control"
The rear automatic climate control is not opera‐
tional if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting or
defogging the windows is active.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically:
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the upper body and into the footwell.
Seite 156
Controls Climate control
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air flow and air distribution can be
adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Manual air distribution
The air distribution can be adjusted to individual
needs.
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
Air flow, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air flow, switch
off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
Press and hold the left button.
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle
interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary.
The system can be switched on and off directly
or by using two preset switch-on times. It re‐
mains switched on for 30 minutes.
Operation can be performed via iDrive.
Parked-car ventilation
Using the preset switch-on time or when oper‐
ated directly: any external temperature.
Seite 157
Climate control Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes if the system is switched on.
The system continues to run for some time after
being switched off.
Preselecting the switch-on time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
Seite 158
Controls Climate control
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated universal remote
control
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can op‐
erate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting sys‐
tems. The integrated universal remote control
replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmit‐
ters. To operate the remote control, the buttons
on the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
in order to program the remote control.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the integrated universal re‐
mote control, ensure that there are no people,
animals, or objects in the range of movement of
the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there
is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the instructions of the system to be
controlled, the system is generally com‐
patible with the integrated universal remote
control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons on the interior
Seite 159
Interior equipment Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐
pends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of
the desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter and the button to be programmed on
the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the
interior rearview mirror will begin flashing
slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. When the LED is flash‐
ing faster, this indicates that the button on
the interior rearview mirror has been pro‐
grammed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance between
the interior rearview mirror and the hand-
held transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may be
necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior rearview mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the interior
rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after re‐
peated programming, please check if the sys‐
tem to be controlled features an alternating-
code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rearview
mirror longer. If the LED on the interior rearview
mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit
constantly for 2 seconds, the system features
an alternating-code system. Flashing and con‐
tinuous illumination of the LED will repeat for
approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system,
the integrated universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual of the system
being set up for information on how to syn‐
chronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
To synchronize:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
repeat this work step up to three times in or‐
der to finish synchronization. Once synchro‐
nization is complete, the programmed func‐
tion will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
transmitter for the system to be controlled
approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The
required distance depends on the manual
transmitter.
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held transmit‐
ter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior
rearview mirror LED flashes more rapidly.
When the LED is flashing faster, this indi‐
cates that the button on the interior rearview
mirror has been programmed. The system
Seite 160
Controls Interior equipment
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
can then be controlled by the button on the
interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the step. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior rearview mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
Controls
Before operation
Before operating a system using the
integrated universal remote control, ensure that
there are no people, animals, or objects within
the range of movement of the remote-controlled
system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or
damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the
button within receiving range of the system until
the function is activated. The interior rearview
mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is
being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Front
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀
Seite 161
Interior equipment Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Rear
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Connecting electrical devices
Hints
Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
may damage the battery.◀
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on. The total
load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at
12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Front center console
Press on the cover.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the front passenger footwell
Socket is located below the glove compartment.
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
Rear center console
Remove cover.
Seite 162
Controls Interior equipment
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
In the cargo area
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
USB interface for data
transfer
The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data on
USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 31.
▷ Music collection, see user's manual for Nav‐
igation, Entertainment and Communication.
With Professional navigation system or
TV: at a glance
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
Without Professional navigation
system or TV: at a glance
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.
Notes
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Cargo area
Cargo cover
Note
Do not deposit heavy objects
Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on
the trunk cover. Otherwise, they could endanger
occupants during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers, for example.◀
Removing
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐
gage.
Seite 163
Interior equipment Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
1. Place your hands into the two recessed
grips on the bottom of the cover.
2. Push up the cover.
The cover can be stowed in the rear cargo area
floor compartment, refer to page 170.
Installing
1.
Insert the cargo cover into the two front re‐
taining pins.
2. Fold down the cover until it engages.
Through-loading system
General information
The cargo area can be expanded by folding
down the cargo partition and the rear seat back‐
rest.
The cargo partition and the rear backrest are
subdivided at a ratio of 40–20–40. You can also
fold down the left and right sides separately.
Foldable rear backrests, manual
Pull the lever. The backrest folds forward.
Fold the backrest back; the backrest engages in
an upright position. Pull the lever again to adjust
the backrest to the desired angle.
Lock the rear seat backrests in position
Before mounting child restraint fixing sys‐
tems, place the seat backrest as far as possible
at an angle at which the child seat is resting
firmly against the backrest and all backrests can
be locked securely in place. Otherwise, the child
seat will not be as stable as it should be, and
there is increased danger of injury due to unex‐
pected movement of the seat backrest.◀
Seite 164
Controls Interior equipment
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Foldable rear backrests, powered
At a glance
1 Fold backrest forward
2 Loading position
3 Basic position
Fold backrest forward
Move the front seats to an upright position
Before folding down the rear backrests,
ensure that the front seats are moved forward
slightly and are in an upright position. Other‐
wise, the head restraint and screen could be
damaged.◀
Press the button until the backrest is
folded all the way forward.
Folding the backrest back
Before anyone can be transported in the rear:
1.
Put the rear seat backrests into their stand‐
ard position.
2. For the best possible individual seat posi‐
tion, adjust the inclination of the rear seat
backrest if necessary.
Adjust the standard position of the rear
seat backrest
Before transporting passengers in the rear and
adjusting the rear seat backrest, set the rear seat
backrest to its basic position. Otherwise, the
rear seats may not effectively restrain passen‐
gers in an accident if the backrests are not ade‐
quately inclined.◀
Loading position
Press the button. The seat moves for‐
ward and the backrest moves to the ba‐
sic position. Comfortable seating is still possible
although knee clearance is reduced.
Basic position
Press and hold the button until the seat
stops automatically in its basic position.
Operation of the rear backrest was
deactivated
After a brief period, operation of the rear back‐
rest is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate operation:
▷ Open or close a door or the tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Folding down the cargo partition
Danger of pinching
Before folding down the trunk partition,
ensure that the area of movement of the parti‐
tion is clear. In particular, ensure that no one is
located in the area of movement and that no one
reaches into the area of movement of the trunk
partition when the middle section is folded
down. Otherwise, injury or damage may result.◀
1.
Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
2. To release the cargo partition, pull the cor‐
responding lever in the cargo area. The
cargo partition folds forward.
Seite 165
Interior equipment Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Unlatching center cargo partition
Press the opener toward the left.
Closing the cargo partition
Fold back and engage the cargo partition.
Danger of pinching
Before closing the trunk partition, make
sure that the closing path is clear; otherwise, in‐
juries may result.◀
Ensure that the lock is securely engaged
Make sure that the lock engages properly
when folding back, otherwise transported cargo
could enter the passenger compartment during
braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger the
vehicle occupants.◀
Loading position
Upright position
To expand the cargo area, the cargo partition
can be moved into a vertical position.
1.
Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
Through-loading system, refer to page 164
2. To release the cargo partition, pull both lev‐
ers in the cargo area. The cargo partition
folds into an upright position and rests
against the rear backrest.
Repositioning
Fold back and engage the cargo partition.
Ski and snowboard bag
General information
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and operation instruc‐
tions included in the protective jacket.
Seite 166
Controls Interior equipment
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Notes
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐
partment without securing them; otherwise,
they may present a danger to occupants for in‐
stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐
vers.◀
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's and front
passenger side, refer to page 167.
▷ Storage compartment in the center console,
refer to page 169.
▷ Storage compartment in the center armrest,
refer to page 168, in the front and rear.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Net in the front passenger footwell.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Driver's side
Opening
Pull the handle.
Seite 167
Storage compartments Controls
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Press the buttons next to the lock.
Locking the storage compartment
The storage compartment in the armrest can be
locked with an integrated key to separately se‐
cure the tailgate, refer to page 41, for example.
After the storage compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed out without the
integrated key, refer to page 30, for instance at
a hotel.
This prevents access to the storage compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
Connection for an external audio
device
.
For a description, see the user's
manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication.
Rear
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Folding down
Pull on the opener and fold the armrest forward.
Opening
Storage compartment in the rear center arm‐
rest.
Seite 168
Controls Storage compartments
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Push the button and fold open the cover.
Storage compartment in the
center console
To open: press the button.
Cupholders
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐
age.◀
Front
To open: press on the cover.
Rear
In the front center armrest.
To open: press the button.
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located next to the grab
handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the
rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐
sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Seite 169
Storage compartments Controls
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Retaining straps
Retaining straps on the left and right side trim
for fastening small objects.
Multi-function hook
There are two multi-function hooks on the cargo
area walls.
1. Open the holder by pressing on the button.
2. Press the bag handle into the holder from
above.
Light and suitable objects only
Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of
objects flying about during braking and evasive
maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has
been appropriately secured.◀
Storage compartments in the floor
Rear compartment
The cargo cover, refer to page 163, can be
stowed in the rear compartment.
To open the cover, pull upward on the handle,
arrow 1.
To close the cover, press downward until it
locks.
You can fix the cover in an upright position, if
needed. To do so, unhook the right-hand retain‐
ing strap and hook it into the rear of the cover.
Do not stow heavy objects
Only stow light objects in the rear com‐
partment; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Front compartment
To open, reach into the recess and raise the
handle, arrow 2.
The cover can be completely removed.
Lashing eyes
To secure the cargo, refer to page 178, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Seite 170
Controls Storage compartments
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Seite 171
Storage compartments Controls
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey the official speed limit.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake discs
and brake pads. Drive moderately during this
break-in period.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Drive with the tailgate closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking or
evasive maneuvers, passengers or other road
users may be injured or the vehicle may be dam‐
aged. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the
passenger compartment.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. When driv‐
ing, standing at idle and while parking, take care
to avoid possible contact between the hot ex‐
haust system and any highly flammable materi‐
Seite 174
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious
personal injury as well as property damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there
is the danger of getting burned.◀
Climate control windshield
The marked area is not covered with heat re‐
flective coating.
Use this area for garage door openers, devices
for electronic toll collection, etc.
Climate control laminated tinted safety
glass
The vehicle glass provides full protection
against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the
skin.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is advised that you do not use mobile commu‐
nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the
vehicle without connecting them directly to the
external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐
tronics and mobile communication devices can
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no
assurance that the radiation generated during
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle
interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec‐
trical systems and the transmission may be
damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Seite 175
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again after they were removed for cleaning, for
example.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the
brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise,
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a
reduction in the brake system efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
necessary.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐
sibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In
addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable
with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops that exits underneath
the vehicle.
Traces of water under the vehicle like this are
normal.
Seite 176
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Loading
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Hints
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carrying
capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss
of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the trunk
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.◀
Determining the load limit
1.
Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle and unstable driving situations may
result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Seite 177
Loading Driving tips
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Stowing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low
as possible, ideally directly behind the cargo
partition.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests,
including the cargo partition, to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
backrests.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes
in the cargo area.
Securing cargo
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
straps.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or
draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above; otherwise, it can endanger the
car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving
becomes necessary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
pants.◀
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Note
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof drip
rail above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Loading
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
Seite 178
Driving tips Loading
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not be too large in area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with
ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Seite 179
Loading Driving tips
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can have an
influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect consumption values in various
ways, for instance consumption can be influ‐
enced by the size of the tires.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
ing on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Seite 180
Driving tips Saving fuel
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac‐
celerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
of switching off the engine.
Using this system can cause certain compo‐
nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐
turely.
In addition, fuel consumption is also determined
by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance or environmental factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐
ice center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 206.
ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine
control and comfort functions, e. g. the climate
control output, are adjusted.
The extension of the range that is achieved as a
result can be displayed in the instrument cluster.
At a glance
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 182
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to
page 183
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 182
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Seite 181
Saving fuel Driving tips
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
3. Configure the program.
Via the iDrive
1.
"Settings"
2. "ECO PRO mode"
Or
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip
▷ "ECO PRO limit:":
Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO
Tip is to be displayed.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO
speed is exceeded.
ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐
cient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling
of the passenger compartment fuel consump‐
tion can be economized.
The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior
mirror heating are also reduced.
The exterior mirror heating is made available
when outside temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO potential
The percentage of potential savings that can be
achieved with the current configuration is dis‐
played.
Display in the instrument cluster
Display in the instrument display
When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display
switches to a special configuration.
Some of the displays may differ from the display
in the instrument cluster.
ECO PRO bonus range
An extension of the range can be
achieved by an adjusted driving
style.
This may be displayed as the bo‐
nus range in the instrument clus‐
ter.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
Driving style
In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in‐
dicates the current efficiency of the driving style.
Mark in the “CHARGE” area, arrow 1: display for
energy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the “POWER” area, arrow 2: display
when accelerating.
The efficiency of the driving style is shown by
the color of the bar:
Seite 182
Driving tips Saving fuel
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as
the mark moves within the blue range.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all con‐
ditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving are
met.
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction
The arrow indicates that the driv‐
ing style can be adjusted to be
more fuel efficient by backing off
the accelerator for instance.
Note
The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in
the instrument cluster appear when the ECO
PRO display is activated.
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "ECO PRO Info" or "Driving mode view"
ECO PRO tip - Symbols
An additional symbol and a text instruction are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving style, back off the
accelerator or delay accelerating to
allow time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Automatic transmission: switch from
S/M to D or avoid manual shift inter‐
ventions.
Indications on the Control Display
EfficientDynamics
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed during driving.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be displayed
within an adjustable time frame.
Vertical bars show consumption for the selected
time frame.
Interruptions in the journey are shown as dark
breaks on the horizontal time axis below the
bars.
"Consumption history"
Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
Select the symbol.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics Info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Automatic engine Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
Seite 183
Saving fuel Driving tips
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ Climate control output.
Display ECO PRO tips
"ECO PRO Tips"
The driving instruction for decelerating in ad‐
vance and an additional symbol show the up‐
coming route section.
The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
Seite 184
Driving tips Saving fuel
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Seite 185
Saving fuel Driving tips
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Mobility
To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this
chapter supplies you with important information
on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and
tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside
Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not
ensured and damage may occur.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1.
Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
Seite 188
Mobility Refueling
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
1. Open the cover on the right side trim.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym‐
bol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel
may escape, causing harm to the environment
and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the gas
station.◀
Seite 189
Refueling Mobility
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Fuel quality
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐
out metallic additives.
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic con‐
verter and other components.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %,
i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐
tem.◀
Recommended fuel quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
formance.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Fuel quality
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
stalling, especially under certain environmental
conditions such as high ambient temperature
and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number
— for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine
deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase
gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.◀
Seite 190
Mobility Fuel
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stability,
but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an
accident.◀
After correcting the tire inflation pressure:
▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 192, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands.
This information can be obtained from your
service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 192, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
Seite 191
Wheels and tires Mobility
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
535i, 550i
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 19 101 Y
RSC
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front:
245/40 R 20 99 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
3.0 / 44
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
535i xDrive, 550i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 19 101 Y
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front:
245/40 R 20 99 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
RSC
2.8 / 41
-
-
3.0 / 44
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Seite 192
Mobility Wheels and tires
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex‐
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and,
if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
table on the following pages. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
535i, 550i
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S RSC
2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 19 101 Y
RSC
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.5 / 36
Front:
245/40 R 20 99 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.8 / 41
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Front:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
RSC
2.9 /42
-
-
3.2 / 46
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S RSC
2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 19 101 Y
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front:
245/40 R 20 99 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.8 / 41
Seite 193
Wheels and tires Mobility
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Front:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
RSC
2.9 /42
-
-
3.3 / 48
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
535i xDrive, 550i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S RSC
2.3 / 33 2.7 / 39
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL RSC
2.5 / 36 2.9 /42
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 19 101 Y
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front:
245/40 R 20 99 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Front:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
RSC
2.8 / 41
-
-
3.0 / 44
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S RSC
2.5 / 36 2.8 / 41
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL RSC
2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 19 101 Y
RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.5 / 36
Front:
245/40 R 20 99 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
RSC
2.8 / 41
-
-
2.8 / 41
Seite 194
Mobility Wheels and tires
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Front:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
RSC
3.0 / 44
-
-
3.2 / 46
Compact wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3510
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3510: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 3510: the tire was manufactured in the
35th week in 2010.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli‐
mate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
Seite 195
Wheels and tires Mobility
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐
sible tire failure.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 198, are labeled with
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
Seite 196
Mobility Wheels and tires
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening
for vehicle occupants and other traffic partici‐
pants.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐
tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob‐
tained from your service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐
ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
are mounted.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
Seite 197
Wheels and tires Mobility
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
New tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐
cialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad
to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against swapping wheels between the front and
rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a pressure loss.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 106.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 109.
Seite 198
Mobility Wheels and tires
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have
been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle,
classified as road-safe and recommended.
Consult your service center for more informa‐
tion.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 245/50 R 18.
▷ 245/45 R 19.
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to
the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
using snow chains.
Snow chain detection
The concept
When using snow chains, you should set
whether you are driving with or without snow
chains via the iDrive.
The snow chain detection system supports you
by automatically showing the detected state on
the Control Display.
When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer‐
ing of the Integral Active Steering is deactivated
automatically.
At speeds above the maximum permitted speed
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear
axle steering is activated again automatically.
Activating the status
1. "Settings"
2. "Tire chains"
3. "Tire chains installed"
Automatic detection
If functioning properly:
▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated .
After you drive a short distance, a Check
Control message is shown and the state is
activated automatically.
Confirm the automatic activation.
▷ Snow chains are not mounted. The setting
is activated .
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check
Control message is displayed. Deactivate
the status manually.
If not functioning properly:
▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated .
A Check Control message is not displayed.
The automatic detection system is malfunc‐
tioning. Activate the status manually.
Activating/deactivating rear axle
steering
If the status indicating that snow chains are in
use is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti‐
vated automatically.
Seite 199
Wheels and tires Mobility
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle
steering is activated again, even though snow
chains are in use.
Seite 200
Mobility Wheels and tires
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number
2 Jump-starting, negative terminal
3 Washer fluid reservoir
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Oil filler neck.
6 Coolant reservoir
Hood
Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Seite 201
Engine compartment Mobility
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Never reach into the engine compartment
Never reach into the intermediate spaces
or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,
there is risk of injury, e.g. from rotating or hot
parts.◀
1. Pull the lever.
2. Press the release handle and open the hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Danger of injury when the hood is open
There is a danger of injury from protruding
parts when the hood is open.◀
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐
diately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 202
Mobility Engine compartment
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Engine oil consumption depends on driving
style and driving conditions, e.g., if your driving
style is very sporty engine oil consumption will
be considerably greater.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
Checking the oil level
electronically
Status display
The concept
The oil level is monitored electronically during
driving and shown on the Control Display.
If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a
check control message is displayed.
Requirements
Depending on the previous displays, the status
display appears when the engine is running or
after the vehicle has been driven for at least 30
minutes.
Displaying the oil level
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these
messages.
If oil level is too low, immediately add 1 US
quart/liter of oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the oil level is
checked and displayed via a scale.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.
Requirements
▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever in
transmission position N or P and accelerator
not depressed.
▷ Vehicle is on a level road and the engine is
running at operating temperature.
Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Seite 203
Engine oil Mobility
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.
Duration: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
Filler neck
When the indicator lights up in the instrument
cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within
the next 125 miles/200 km.
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types for refilling
Hints
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine damage.◀
Viscosity grades for engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine dam‐
age may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐
able in all countries.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Additional information about the approved
types of oils can be requested from the service
center.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be added:
Gasoline engine
API SM or superior grade specification
Oil change
An oil change should be carried out by your
service center only.
Seite 204
Mobility Engine oil
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Coolant
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.
Coolant level
If there is no Min and Max mark in the filler neck
of the coolant reservoir, have the coolant level
checked if necessary by your service center and
add coolant as needed.
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, and then open it.
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the
filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Seite 205
Coolant Mobility
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
BMW Maintenance System
The maintenance system directs you to re‐
quired maintenance measures and thereby sup‐
ports you in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Details on the service requirements, refer to
page 89, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and suggest
the right array of service procedures for your ve‐
hicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control that you used most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed by
your service center. Make sure to have regular
maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models, and in the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐
tries are proof of regular maintenance.
Seite 206
Mobility Maintenance
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehicle
emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
Canadian model: warning light indi‐
cates the engine symbol.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period can
seriously damage emission control compo‐
nents, in particular the catalytic converter.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that fuel
vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened,
the display should go out in a short time.
Seite 207
Maintenance Mobility
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the rear
compartment in the cargo area, refer to
page 170.
Wiper blade replacement
General information
Do not fold down the wipers without wiper
blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have
not been installed; this may damage the wind‐
shield.◀
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to
page 77, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up the wipers.
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐
sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Lamp and bulb replacement
Notes
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
Seite 208
Mobility Replacing components
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
the service center if you are unfamiliar with them
or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at the service center.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system, you
should always switch off the lights affected to
prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center. Due to the high voltage present
in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries
if work is carried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
serve as the light source for controls, display el‐
ements and other equipment.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never stare
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐
wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
lamp glasses do not need to be changed.
If the headlamps do not dim despite driving with
the light switched on, increasing humidity forms,
e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service
center check this.
Xenon headlamps
At a glance
1 Corner-illuminating lamps
2 Parking lamp, daytime running lights
3 Low beams/high beams
4 Turn signal
Hints
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
Seite 209
Replacing components Mobility
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center. Due to the high voltage present
in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries
if work is carried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, turn signal lamp
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 208.
These lights feature LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Corner-illuminating lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 208.
The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
55-watt bulb, H7
1. Fold open the cover in the engine compart‐
ment.
2. Unscrew the cap and remove it.
3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Front fog lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 208.
Seite 210
Mobility Replacing components
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
35-watt bulb, H8
1. Carefully pull out the grill toward the front.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Pull the lamp out toward the front.
4. Remove the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1 Turn signal
2 Tail lamp
3 Inside brake lamp
4 Reversing lamp
5 Outside brake lamp
Turn signal, brake, tail, and license
plate lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 208.
These lights feature LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Lamps in the tailgate
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 208.
Access to the lamps
1.
Remove the four screws using the screw
driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
2. Pull down the cover with a firm tug.
Seite 211
Replacing components Mobility
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
3. Pull off the connector toward the left.
4. Replace the bulb.
Inside brake lamp
To change the brake lamp, contact your service
center.
Reversing lamp
16-watt bulb, W16W.
Turn the bulb, pull it out, and replace it.
Changing wheels
Notes
The vehicle equipment does not include a spare
tire.
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in the
event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated in the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you on
questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
Seite 212
Mobility Replacing components
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available and that any Check Control messages
are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
may damage the battery.◀
General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged peri‐
ods, longer than a month.
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 217, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Radio station: save again.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability of
the navigation.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Notes
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box in
the cargo area.
In the glove compartment
Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid,
arrow 2.
Seite 213
Replacing components Mobility
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
In the cargo area
Open the cover on the right side trim.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 214
Mobility Replacing components
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Emergency Request
Requirements
▷ Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone.
An Emergency Request can be made, even
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐
hicle.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
▷ The radio ready state is switched on.
▷ The BMW Assist system is logged into a
wireless communications network sup‐
ported by BMW Assist.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
▷ A ConnectedDrive contract is available.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Hints
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
conditions.◀
Service contract
▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐
tivated by the service center without you
having to visit a workshop.
After deactivation, an Emergency Request
is no longer possible.
▷ Under certain circumstances, the system
can be reactivated by a service center after
you sign a new contract.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1.
Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
Seite 215
Breakdown assistance Mobility
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
▷ The LED flashes when a connection to the
BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished.
When the emergency request is received at
the BMW Response Center, the BMW Re‐
sponse Center contacts you and takes fur‐
ther steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Response Center can take further steps to
help you under certain circumstances.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle if
it can be established, are transmitted to the
BMW Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Response
Center cannot be heard on the hands-free
system, the hands-free system may be mal‐
functioning. However, the BMW Response
Center may still be able to hear you.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately after
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the left in the
cargo area.
Release the Velcro® fastener to remove it.
First aid kit
Storage
The first aid kit is generally located in a storage
compartment on the right side in the cargo area.
To remove it, raise the cover by the corner, see
arrow.
If your vehicle is equipped with Integral Active
Steering, the first aid kit is located in a storage
compartment under the cargo area floor.
To take it out, lift the cover.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.
Seite 216
Mobility Breakdown assistance
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can be
viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside
Assistance can be established directly. Phone,
see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication.
Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
nents while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This informa‐
tion can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐
minal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of the
vehicle to be started.
Seite 217
Breakdown assistance Mobility
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐
tery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Transporting your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the event
of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a loading
platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle re‐
sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Towing methods when towing other
vehicles
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Seite 218
Mobility Breakdown assistance
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during cor‐
nering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐
cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW. It is located in the on‐
board vehicle tool kit under the cargo area floor.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐
hicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.
Tow-starting
Note
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Seite 219
Breakdown assistance Mobility
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Care
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Car washes
Hints
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
Ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 in‐
ches/80 cm from the glass sunroof is maintained
at all times. Holding them too close or using ex‐
cessively high pressures or temperatures can
cause damage or preliminary damage that may
then lead to long-term damage.
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure
washer.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control, for extended periods of
time and only from a distance of at least
12 in/30 cm.◀
Regularly remove foreign items such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the hood
is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐
hicle.
Automatic car washes
Notes
Note the following:
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width of
the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 77,to avoid unintentional wiper activa‐
tion.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be
triggered by the interior motion sensor of the
alarm system. Follow the instructions on
avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to
page 44.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car
wash, take the following steps:
1.
Release parking brake, refer to page 72, and
deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to
page 74.
2. Drive into the car wash.
3. Depress the brake pedal as needed.
Seite 220
Mobility Care
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
4. Engage transmission position N.
5. Switch the engine off. In this way, the igni‐
tion remains switched on, and a Check-Con‐
trol message is displayed.
Transmission position P with the igni‐
tion off
When the ignition is switched off, position P
is engaged automatically. When in an auto‐
matic car wash, for example, ensure that the
ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in transmission position N. A signal is
sounded when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlamps
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can
occur.
Completely remove all residues on the windows,
to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency
and extent of your car care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every two
months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Seite 221
Care Mobility
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter
months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐
larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐
ers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐
icon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Headliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Lightly dampen the cloth with water.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to
surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts
until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Seite 222
Mobility Care
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again after they were removed for cleaning, for
example.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passenger
compartment for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household cleans‐
ers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
Seite 223
Care Mobility
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Dimensions
Width, height with roof-mounted aerial
1 Vehicle height: 61.4 inches / 1,559 mm
2 Vehicle width, without mirrors: 74.9 in‐
ches / 1,901 mm
3 Vehicle width with mirrors: 83.9 in‐
ches / 2,132 mm
Seite 226
Reference Technical data
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Length, wheel base
1 Wheel base: 120.9 inches / 3,070 mm 2 Length: 196.8 inches / 4,999 mm
Smallest turning circle
Ø: 40 ft/12.2 m xDrive Ø: 41 ft/12.5 m
Weights
535i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,710/2,590
Load lbs/kg 1,014/460
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,668/1,210
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,307/1,500
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700
Seite 227
Technical data Reference
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
550i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,955/2,701
Load lbs/kg 970/440
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,845/1,290
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,305/1,499
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700
535i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,864/2,660
Load lbs/kg 1,014/460
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,778/1,260
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,307/1,500
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700
550i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,095/2,765
Load lbs/kg 970/440
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,975/1,349
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,305/1,499
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 15.5-60/440-1,700
Seite 228
Reference Technical data
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 122
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 130
Activated-charcoal filter 155
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 118
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go, ACC 130
Active Protection 120
Active seat, front 52
Active seat ventilation,
front 52
Active seat ventilation,
rear 55
Active Steering, integral 125
Adaptive brake assistant 122
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 120
Adaptive drive 125
Adaptive light control 99
Additives, oil 204
Adjust front seat 49
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 49
After washing vehicle 221
Airbags 102
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 103
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 154
Air, dehumidifying, refer to
Cooling function 154
Air distribution, manual 153
Air flow, automatic climate
control 153
Air pressure, tires 191
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 155
Alarm system 43
Alarm, unintentional 44
All around the center con‐
sole 14
All around the headliner 15
All around the steering
wheel 12
ALL program, automatic cli‐
mate control 154
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 198
All-wheel-drive 124
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 160
Alternative oil types 204
Ambient light 101
Antifreeze, washer fluid 78
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 122
Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 122
Approved axle load 227
Approved engine oils 204
Armrest, refer to Center arm‐
rest 168
Arrival time 93
Ashtray 161
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 216
Assistance when driving
off 122
AUTO H button, refer to Auto‐
matic Hold 74
AUTO intensity 153
Automatic car wash 220
Automatic climate con‐
trol 152
Automatic Cruise Control with
Stop & Go 130
Automatic Curb Monitor 60
Automatic deactivation, front
passenger airbags 104
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 98
Automatic Hold 74
Automatic locking 37
Automatic recirculated-air
control 154
Automatic Soft Closing,
doors 38
Automatic Soft Closing, tail‐
gate 39
Automatic tailgate 39
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 78
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 153
AUTO program, intensity 153
Auto Start/Stop function 70
Average fuel consumption 93
Average speed 93
Axle loads, weights 227
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 51
Backrest, width 51
Back seats, adjusting 53
Backup camera 140
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 216
Bar for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 218
Basic position, rear seats 55
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 212
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 31
Battery, vehicle 212
Belts, safety belts 56
Seite 230
Reference Everything from A to Z
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 169
Blinds, sun protection 46
BMW Assist, see user's
manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communica‐
tion
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 206
Bonus range, ECO PRO 182
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 169
Brake assistant 122
Brake assistant, adaptive 122
Brake discs, breaking in 174
Brake force display 120
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 120
Brake lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 211
Brake lights, adaptive 120
Brake pads, breaking in 174
Braking, notes 175
Breakdown assis‐
tance 215, 216
Breaking in 174
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 96
Bulb replacement 208
Bulb replacement, rear 211
Bulbs and lamps 208
Button assignment for remote
control 30
Button, RES 132
Button, Start/Stop 68
Bypassing, refer to Jump-
starting 217
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera, backup camera 141
Camera, care 223
Camera, Side View 143
Camera, Top View 144
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 169
Car battery 212
Car care products 221
Care, displays 223
Care, vehicle 221
Cargo 177
Cargo area 163
Cargo area, enlarging 164
Cargo area lid 38
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 170
Cargo cover 163
Cargo partition 165
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 178
Car key, refer to Remote con‐
trol 30
Carpet, care 222
Car wash 220
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 174
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 206
CD/Multimedia, see user's
manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communica‐
tion
Center armrest 168
Center console 14
Central locking system 34
Central screen, refer to Control
Display 16
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 7
Changing parts 208
Changing wheels 212
Changing wheels/tires 197
Check Control 85
Children, seating position 63
Children, transporting
safely 63
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 63
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 64
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 63
Child safety locks 67
Child seat, mounting 63
Child seats 63
Chrome parts, care 222
Cigarette lighter 161
Cleaning, displays 223
Climate control 152
Climate control wind‐
shield 175
Clock 88
Closing/opening from in‐
side 37
Closing/opening via door
lock 36
Closing/opening with remote
control 34
Clothes hooks 169
Collision warning 110, 112
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signals 75
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 76
COMFORT+ program, Driving
Dynamics Control 128
Comfort Access 41
COMFORT program, Driving
Dynamics Control 128
Computer 92
Condensation on win‐
dows 153
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 176
Condition Based Service
CBS 206
Configure driving mode 129
Confirmation signal 35
ConnectedDrive, see user's
manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communica‐
tion
Control Display 16
Control Display, settings 95
Seite 231
Everything from A to Z Reference
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Controller 16
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 122
Convenient opening 35
Coolant 205
Coolant temperature 88
Cooling function 154
Cooling, maximum 153
Cooling system 205
Corrosion on brake discs 176
Cruise control 136
Cruise control, active with
Stop & Go 130
Cruising range 89
Cupholder 169
Curb weight 227
Current fuel consumption 89
D
Damage, tires 196
Damping control, dy‐
namic 125
Data, technical 226
Date 89
Daytime running lights 98
Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 153
Dehumidifying, air 154
Destination distance 93
Digital clock 88
Dimensions 226
Dimmable exterior mirrors 61
Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 61
Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 75
Display in windshield 150
Display lighting, refer to Instru‐
ment lighting 100
Displays 81, 82
Displays, cleaning 223
Disposal, vehicle battery 213
Distance control, refer to
PDC 138
Distance, selecting for
ACC 132
Distance to destination 93
Divided screen view, split
screen 20
Door lock, refer to Remote
control 30
Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐
ing 38
Downhill control 124
Drive-off assistant 122
Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 122
Driving Dynamics Control 127
Driving instructions, breaking
in 174
Driving mode 127
Driving notes, general 174
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 122
Driving tips 174
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 122
DTC driving dynamics 123
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 123
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 125
Dynamic Drive 125
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 122
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 123
E
ECO PRO 181
ECO PRO, bonus range 182
ECO PRO display 181
ECO PRO driving mode 181
ECO PRO mode 181
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruc‐
tion 183
EfficientDynamics 183
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 82
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 122
Emergency detection, remote
control 31
Emergency release, door
lock 37
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 188
Emergency release, parking
brake 72
Emergency Request 215
Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 216
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 31
Emergency unlocking, tail‐
gate 41
Energy Control 89
Energy recovery 89
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 70
Engine, automatic switch-
off 70
Engine compartment 201
Engine compartment, working
in 201
Engine coolant 205
Engine oil 203
Engine oil, adding 204
Engine oil additives 204
Engine oil change 204
Engine oil filler neck 204
Engine oil temperature 88
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 204
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 204
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 31
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 217
Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 69
Engine stop 69
Engine temperature 88
Entering a car wash 220
Seite 232
Reference Everything from A to Z
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Equipment, interior 159
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to DSC 122
Exchanging wheels/tires 197
Exhaust system 174
Exterior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 61
Exterior mirrors 60
External start 217
External temperature dis‐
play 88
External temperature warn‐
ing 88
Eyes for securing cargo 178
F
Failure message, refer to
Check Control 85
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
tional alarm 44
Fan, refer to Air flow 153
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 85
Filler neck for engine oil 204
Fine wood, care 222
First aid kit 216
Fitting for towing, refer to Tow
fitting 219
Flat tire, changing wheels 212
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 105
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 107
Flat tire, warning
lamp 106, 108
Flooding 175
Floor carpet, care 222
Floor mats, care 222
Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 77
Foot brake 175
Front airbags 102
Front fog lamps 100
Front fog lamps, front, bulb re‐
placement 210
Front passenger airbags, au‐
tomatic deactivation 104
Front passenger airbags, indi‐
cator lamp 104
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 105
Fuel cap 188
Fuel consumption, current 89
Fuel consumption, refer to
Average fuel consump‐
tion 93
Fuel filler flap 188
Fuel gauge 88
Fuel quality 190
Fuel, tank capacity 229
Fuse 213
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 159
Gasoline 190
Gasoline quality 190
Gear change, automatic trans‐
mission 79
General driving notes 174
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐
amic glass sunroof 47
Glove compartment 167
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 227
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 72
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 160
Hazard warning flashers 215
HDC Hill Descent Control 124
Head airbags 102
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 98
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 98
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture via remote control 35
Headlamp flasher 76
Headlamp glass 209
Headlamps, care 221
Headlamp washer system 76
Headliner 15
Head restraints 49
Head restraints, front 57
Head restraints, rear 58
Head-Up Display 150
Head-up Display, care 223
Heavy cargo, stowing 178
Height with roof-mounted aer‐
ial, vehicle 226
High-beam Assistant 99
High beams 76
High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 99
Hill Descent Control HDC 124
Hills 176
Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 122
Hints 6
Holder for beverages 169
Homepage 6
Hood 201
Horn 12
Hotel function, tailgate 41
Hot exhaust system 174
HUD Head-Up Display 150
Hydroplaning 175
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 88
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 88
Identification marks, tires 195
Identification number, refer to
Important features in the en‐
gine compartment 201
iDrive 16
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 30
Seite 233
Everything from A to Z Reference
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Ignition off 68
Ignition on 68
Indication of a flat
tire 106, 108
Individual air distribution 153
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 31
Inflation pressure, tires 191
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 105
Info display, refer to Com‐
puter 92
Initialization, Integral Active
Steering 126
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 108
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 105
Instrument cluster 81
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 82
Instrument display, multifunc‐
tional 82
Instrument lighting 100
Integral Active Steering 125
Integrated key 30
Integrated universal remote
control 159
Intensity, AUTO program 153
Interior equipment 159
Interior lamps 101
Interior lamps via remote con‐
trol 35
Interior motion sensor 44
Interior rearview mirror 61
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming feature 61
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 89
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 212
Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 212
Joystick, automatic transmis‐
sion 79
Jump-starting 217
K
Key/remote control 30
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 41
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 31
Kickdown, automatic trans‐
mission 79
Knee airbag 102
L
Lamp replacement 208
Lamp replacement, rear 211
Lamps 97
Lamps and bulbs 208
Lane departure warning 117
Lane margin, warning 117
Language on Control Dis‐
play 95
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 178
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 64
Leather, care 221
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 209
Length, vehicle 227
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 21
License plate lamp, bulb re‐
placement 211
Light-alloy wheels, care 222
Light control 99
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 209
Lighting 97
Lighting, speaker 101
Lighting via remote control 35
Light switch 97
Load 177
Loading 177
Loading position 166
Lock, door 36
Locking/unlocking from in‐
side 37
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 36
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 34
Locking, automatic 37
Locking, central 34
Locking via tailgate 39
Lock, power window 46
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 67
Low beams 97
Low beams, automatic, refer to
High-beam Assistant 99
Lower back support 51
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 178
Lumbar support 51
M
Maintenance 206
Maintenance require‐
ments 206
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 89
Maintenance system,
BMW 206
Malfunction displays, refer to
Check Control 85
Malfunction, self-leveling sus‐
pension 126
Manual air distribution 153
Manual air flow 153
Manual brake, refer to Parking
brake 72
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 80
Manual operation, backup
camera 141
Manual operation, door
lock 37
Seite 234
Reference Everything from A to Z
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Manual operation, exterior mir‐
rors 60
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 188
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 139
Manual operation, parking
brake 72
Manual operation, Side
View 143
Manual operation, Top
View 145
Marking on approved
tires 197
Marking, run-flat tires 198
Massage seat, front 52
Master key, refer to Remote
control 30
Maximum cooling 153
Maximum speed, display 90
Maximum speed, winter
tires 198
Measure, units of 96
Medical kit 216
Memory for seat, mirrors,
steering wheel 59
Menu, EfficientDynamics 183
Menu in instrument cluster 92
Menus, operating, iDrive 16
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 17
Messages, refer to Check
Control 85
Microfilter 155
Minimum tread, tires 196
Mirror 60
Mirror memory 59
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 175
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 7
Moisture in headlamp 209
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 16
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 63
Multifunctional instrument
display 82
Multi-function hook 170
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 12
N
Navigation, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 57
Neck restraints, rear, refer to
Head restraints 58
New wheels and tires 197
Night Vision with pedestrian
detection 114
No Passing Information 90
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 219
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 207
Obstacle marking, backup
camera 142
Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐
line quality 190
Odometer 88
Office, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Oil 203
Oil, adding 204
Oil additives 204
Oil change 204
Oil change interval, service re‐
quirements 89
Oil filler neck 204
Oil types, alternative 204
Oil types, approved 204
Old batteries, disposal 213
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 207
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 16
Onboard vehicle tool kit 208
Opening/closing from in‐
side 37
Opening/closing via door
lock 36
Opening/closing with remote
control 34
Opening the tailgate with no-
touch activation 42
Opening the trunk lid with no-
touch activation 42
Operating concept, iDrive 16
Optional equipment, standard
equipment 6
Outside air, refer to Automatic
recirculated-air control 154
Overheating of engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 88
Overtaking prohibitions 90
P
Paint, vehicle 221
Panoramic glass sunroof 47
Parallel parking assistant 146
Park Distance Control
PDC 138
Parked-car ventilation 157
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 176
Parking aid, refer to PDC 138
Parking assistant 146
Parking brake 72
Parking lamps 97
Parking with Auto Hold 74
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 60
Pathway lines, backup cam‐
era 142
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 138
Pedestrian detection, refer to
Night Vision 114
Seite 235
Everything from A to Z Reference
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
People detection, refer to
Night Vision 114
Personal Profile 31
Pinch protection system, glass
sunroof 47
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 45
Plastic, care 222
Power failure 213
Power windows 45
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 191
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 105
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 31
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 20
Protective function, glass sun‐
roof 47
Protective function, win‐
dows 45
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 16
R
Radiator fluid 205
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 30
Radio ready state 69
Radio, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Rain sensor 77
Rear automatic climate con‐
trol 156
Rear axle steering 125
Rear lamps 211
Rear seats, adjusting 53
Rear seats, basic position 55
Rear sockets 162
Rearview mirror 60
Rear window defroster 154
Recirculated-air mode 154
Recommended tire
brands 197
Refueling 188
Remaining range 89
Remote control/key 30
Remote control, button as‐
signment 30
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 36
Remote control, universal 159
Replacement fuse 213
Replacing parts 208
Replacing wheels/tires 197
Reporting safety defects 9
RES button 132
Reserve warning, refer to
Range 89
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 108
Residual heat, automatic cli‐
mate control 154
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 178
Retreaded tires 198
Reversing lamp, bulb replace‐
ment 211
Roadside parking lamps 98
Roller sunblinds 46
Roll stabilization, refer to
Adaptive Drive 125
Roll stabilization, refer to Dy‐
namic Drive 125
RON gasoline quality 190
Roof load capacity 227
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 178
Rope for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 219
RSC Run Flat System Compo‐
nent, refer to Run-flat
tires 198
Rubber components,
care 222
Run-flat tires 198
S
Safe braking 175
Safety 7
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passenger
seat 56
Safety belts 56
Safety belts, care 222
Safety Package, refer to Active
Protection 120
Safety switch, windows 46
Safety systems, airbags 102
Saving fuel 180
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 16
Screwdriver 208
Screw thread for tow fit‐
ting 219
Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 56
Seat heating, front 52
Seat heating, rear 55
Seating position for chil‐
dren 63
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory 59
Seats 49
Seats, rear, adjusting 53
Seat ventilation, front 52
Seat ventilation, rear 55
Selection list in instrument
cluster 92
Selector lever, automatic
transmission 79
Self-leveling suspension, air
suspension 126
Self-leveling suspension, mal‐
function 126
Sensors, care 223
Service and warranty 7
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service CBS 206
Service requirements, dis‐
play 89
Seite 236
Reference Everything from A to Z
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 216
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 95
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
rors, steering wheel 59
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion 78
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 80
Shoulder support 51
Side airbags 102
Side View 143
Signaling, horn 12
Signals when unlocking 35
Sitting safely 49
Size 226
Ski and snowboard bag 166
Slide/tilt glass roof 47
Smallest turning circle 227
Smoker's package 161
Snow chains 199
Socket 162
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 207
SOS button 215
Spare fuse 213
Speaker lighting 101
Specified engine oil
types 204
Speed, average 93
Speed limit detection, on‐
board computer 93
Speed limiter, display 90
Speed Limit Information 90
Speed limit in the com‐
puter 93
Split screen 20
SPORT+ - program, Dynamic
Driving Control 128
Sport automatic transmis‐
sion 80
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 128
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 80
Stability control systems 122
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 70
Start/Stop button 68
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 31
Starting the engine 69
Status display, tires 107
Status information, iDrive 19
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steering, Integral Active
Steering 125
Steering wheel, adjusting 62
Steering wheel heating 62
Steering wheel memory 59
Steptronic, automatic trans‐
mission 78
Stopping the engine 69
Storage compartment in the
center console 169
Storage compartments 167
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 167
Storage, tires 198
Storing the vehicle 223
Summer tires, tread 196
Supplementary text mes‐
sage 87
Surround View 140
Suspension settings 127
Switch for Dynamic Driving
Control 127
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 158
Switch, refer to Cockpit 12
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 88
Tail and brake lamps 211
Tailgate 38
Tailgate, automatic 39
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
ing 41
Tailgate, hotel function 41
Tailgate opening with no-
touch activation 42
Tailgate via remote control 35
Tail lamps 211
Tail lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 211
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 7
Technical data 226
Telephone, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 153
Temperature display, external
temperature 88
Temperature, engine oil 88
Tempomat, refer to Active
Cruise Control 130
Terminal, jump-starting 217
Text message, supplemen‐
tary 87
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 43
Theft protection, refer to Cen‐
tral locking system 34
Thermal camera, refer to Night
Vision 114
Through-loading system 164
Tilt alarm sensor 44
Time of arrival 93
Tire damage 196
Tire identification marks 195
Tire inflation pressure 191
Tire inflation pressure monitor,
refer to FTM 105
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 107
Tires, changing 197
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 191
Tires, run-flat tires 198
Tire tread 196
Tone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Seite 237
Everything from A to Z Reference
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
Tools 208
Top View 144
Total vehicle weight 227
Tow fitting 219
Towing 218
Tow-starting 218
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 107
Traction control 123
TRACTION program, Dynamic
Driving Control 127
Transmission, automatic 78
Transporting children
safely 63
Tread, tires 196
Trip computer 94
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 75
Trip odometer 88
Trunk lid 38
Trunk lid, automatic 39
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐
ing 41
Trunk lid, hotel function 41
Trunk lid via remote con‐
trol 35
Turning circle 227
Turning circle lines, backup
camera 142
Turn signals, operation 75
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 211
U
Unintentional alarm 44
Units of measure 96
Universal remote control 159
Unlock button, automatic
transmission 79
Unlocking/locking from in‐
side 37
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 36
Unlocking/locking with remote
control 34
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 222
USB interface 163
V
Variable button assignment for
remote control 30
Variable steering, Integral Ac‐
tive Steering 125
Vehicle battery 212
Vehicle battery, replacing 212
Vehicle, breaking in 174
Vehicle care 221
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification number
in the engine compart‐
ment 201
Vehicle jack 212
Vehicle paint 221
Vehicle storage 223
Vehicle wash 220
Ventilation 155
Ventilation, refer to Parked-car
ventilation 157
Voice activation system 22
W
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 85
Warning triangle 216
Washer fluid 78
Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐
pacity 229
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 77
Washer system 76
Washing, vehicle 220
Water on roads 175
Weights 227
Welcome lamps 97
Wheel base, vehicle 227
Wheels, changing 197
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 191
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 105
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 107
Width, vehicle 226
Window defroster, rear 154
Windows, powered 45
Windshield, climate con‐
trol 175
Windshield washer fluid 78
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 77
Windshield washer system 76
Windshield wiper 76
Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 77
Winter storage, care 223
Winter tires, suitable tires 198
Winter tires, tread 196
Wiper blades, replacing 208
Wiper fluid 78
Wiper system 76
Wood, care 222
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 21
Wrench 208
X
xDrive 124
Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
placement 209
Seite 238
Reference Everything from A to Z
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
01 40 2 917 498 ue
*BL291749800G*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 917 498 - II/13
